TWI335154B - Wireless audio distribution system - Google Patents

Wireless audio distribution system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI335154B
TWI335154B TW94138686A TW94138686A TWI335154B TW I335154 B TWI335154 B TW I335154B TW 94138686 A TW94138686 A TW 94138686A TW 94138686 A TW94138686 A TW 94138686A TW I335154 B TWI335154 B TW I335154B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
audio
receiver
sequence
data
setting selector
Prior art date
Application number
TW94138686A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW200637218A (en
Inventor
Lawrence Richenstein
Michael A Dauk
Robert J Withoff
Original Assignee
Unwired Technology Llc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Unwired Technology Llc filed Critical Unwired Technology Llc
Publication of TW200637218A publication Critical patent/TW200637218A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI335154B publication Critical patent/TWI335154B/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04HBROADCAST COMMUNICATION
    • H04H20/00Arrangements for broadcast or for distribution combined with broadcast
    • H04H20/53Arrangements specially adapted for specific applications, e.g. for traffic information or for mobile receivers
    • H04H20/61Arrangements specially adapted for specific applications, e.g. for traffic information or for mobile receivers for local area broadcast, e.g. instore broadcast
    • H04H20/62Arrangements specially adapted for specific applications, e.g. for traffic information or for mobile receivers for local area broadcast, e.g. instore broadcast for transportation systems, e.g. in vehicles
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04HBROADCAST COMMUNICATION
    • H04H20/00Arrangements for broadcast or for distribution combined with broadcast
    • H04H20/28Arrangements for simultaneous broadcast of plural pieces of information
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04HBROADCAST COMMUNICATION
    • H04H20/00Arrangements for broadcast or for distribution combined with broadcast
    • H04H20/65Arrangements characterised by transmission systems for broadcast
    • H04H20/71Wireless systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04HBROADCAST COMMUNICATION
    • H04H40/00Arrangements specially adapted for receiving broadcast information
    • H04H40/18Arrangements characterised by circuits or components specially adapted for receiving
    • H04H40/27Arrangements characterised by circuits or components specially adapted for receiving specially adapted for broadcast systems covered by groups H04H20/53 - H04H20/95
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N7/00Television systems
    • H04N7/10Adaptations for transmission by electrical cable
    • H04N7/106Adaptations for transmission by electrical cable for domestic distribution

Description

1335154 九、發明說明: 【發明所屬之技術領域】 本發明係關於無線通訊系統,且更明確地說,係關於用 於將來自一或多個源之複數個可選音訊_視訊訊號提供至 汽車、飛機或建築物中之-或多個收聽者的無線音訊及視 訊系統。 【先前技術】1335154 IX. DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION: TECHNICAL FIELD OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates to wireless communication systems and, more particularly, to providing a plurality of selectable audio-visual signals from one or more sources to a car Wireless audio and video systems in the aircraft or in buildings - or multiple listeners. [Prior Art]

目前已知並可購得之無線音訊系統大體上包含將一訊號 傳輸至一或多個無線耳機的一音訊源(諸如調諧器),其中 訊號載運單一立體聲頻道之音訊資料。為了選擇一不同音 訊資料頻道,某人必須操作調諧器以傳輸新的所要頻道’ 此時接收該訊號之所有無線耳機將開始再生新頻道。 目前已知雙頻道系統。舉例而言,由無線技術邏輯鍵路 控制(Unwired Technology LLC)出售之雙頻道自動紅外線 耳機系統(Two-Channel Autom〇tive Infrare(i Headph〇neCurrently known and commercially available wireless audio systems generally include an audio source (such as a tuner) that transmits a signal to one or more wireless headsets, wherein the signal carries audio data for a single stereo channel. In order to select a different audio data channel, someone must operate the tuner to transmit the new desired channel. All wireless headsets that receive the signal at this time will begin to regenerate the new channel. A dual channel system is currently known. For example, the dual channel automatic infrared headset system sold by Unwired Technology LLC (Two-Channel Autom〇tive Infrare (i Headph〇ne)

System)提供一可連接至兩個立體聲源並將為每一頻道傳 輸不同IR訊號之紅外線傳輸器。無線耳機具有一頻道a/b 選擇開關,以允許耳機之使用者在兩個頻道中選擇。此系 統需要兩個獨立之立體聲源,且依賴區分於兩個音訊頻道 之間之不同頻率(意即,顏色)之汛發光二極體(led)。此 系統亦需要將傳輸器安裝於一位置處,在該處傳播之兩個 訊號可在車輛内任何位置處被接收。 亦已知無線視訊系統。 需要一種包含一 或多個無線接收裝置(諸如耳機)之經改 I06124.doc 1335154 良之無線通訊系統,其中該系統提供多個 訊訊號及其它資料,以供由每-各自接收裝置在^ = 4亍 <固別選挥 ^ χ 、谭。該系統在家庭或車輛内應佔據最小空間,且 ^理想上應足夠靈活’以允許類比通訊及數位通訊並將同 ^傳輸之不同訊號之間的干擾最小化。 【發明内容】 一無線音訊分配系統可具有一無線傳輸器,其回應複數 =音訊輸入頻道,用於傳輸載運音訊之訊號;一接收器, 其回應經傳輪之訊號,用於根據㈣收n處之本機設定選 器來k擇s亥專音訊輸入頻道之一或多個加以再生。(例 如)司機可選擇性地使用諸如麥克風之額外音訊源,來通 過行動電話交談,或根據一可用以更動本機設定(諸如音 孔頻道或s置選擇)的主設定選擇器,經由該無線音訊分 配系統對乘客做出通告。 此等及其它特徵及優勢將自具體說明及隨後之附圖變得 進步明顯。在圖示及說明中,數字指示各種特徵,在所 有圖不及說明中’類似數字指示類似特徵。 【實施方式】 參看圖1,所揭示之無線通訊系統之一實施例為無線耳 機系統10,其包含經由紅外線(IR)或射頻(RF)訊號16與耳 機單元14通訊的傳輸器子系統12,訊號16較佳為包含多頻 道數位化音訊資料、校正資料以及程式碼或控制資料的格 式化數位位元流。正被傳輸及接收之資料可遵循諸如紅外 線資料協會或IRDA之用於ir資料通訊的工業標準或與其 106l24.doc 1335154 相容。 傳輸器子系統12 IR傳輸器部分18包含諸如紅外線發光 —極體或LED之IR傳輸器2〇,其由一接收來自一或多個數 位讯號處理器或DSP(諸如DSP編碼器及控制器24、27、28 及/或3〇)之數位化音訊資料的適當IR傳輸驅動器22所驅 動車x佳根據以下在本文中參看圖3、圖1 〇及圖16所描述 之專屬格式之任一者,來格式化由IR傳輸器部分18提供之 數位資料流。 可自組合於訊號組合器/多工器32中之複數個此種DSp編 碼态及控制器,將數位化音訊資料應用於IR傳輸驅動器 22,訊號組合器/多工器32可為獨立提供、與IR傳輸器部 刀1 8,‘且。或連同DSP編碼器與控制器24 —起組合於主控制 裔26中。主控制& 26可包含於—諸如如所示之音訊裝置^ 之第一音訊裝置内,其提供為獨立單元或包含於以傳輸器 部分1 8内。 在其中主控制器26包含於音訊裝置34内之系統組態中, 包含音訊裝置34、IR傳輸器部分18及耳機單元从無線耳 機系統1G可有利地充當適於用作單頻道無線耳機系統的基 礎或輸入級系統,根據以下在本文中參看圖3、圖1〇及圖 16所描述之專屬格式’該單頻道無線耳機系統可易於升 級,以用作多頻道無線耳機系統。為說明之目的,在圖丄 中將音訊裝置34描述為包含音訊級%,其具有諸如線"原、 38及線2源40之f Μ二音訊源,每—音訊源連接至諸 如立體聲頻道1電路42之立體聲處理電路,該電路^之輪 106124.doc 1335154 出應用於主控制器26。音訊裝置34因此表示包含單聲無線 電(mono radio)及立體聲無線電、cd及錄音帶播放器、迷 知、碟片播放器以及提供其他類型訊號之諸如電腦、電視 機、DVD播放器及其類似物之電子裝置之音訊部分的任何 音訊、視訊或資料源。 無論是包含為一初始安裝之部分還是稍後升級,諸如 MP3、WMA或其它數位音訊格式播放器料的一第二音訊源 可包含於無線耳機系統1〇内,以提供一第二頻道之立體聲 音讯訊號。詳言之,Mp3播放器44可便利地由將線3源48 及線4源50提供至立體聲頻道電路52之音訊級46來表示, 忒立體聲頻道電路52之輸出可為線路輸出、揚聲器輸出或 耳機輪出埠。如圖i令所示,可將立體聲頻道電路52之輸 出應用於DSP編碼器及控制器27,以供在包含於音訊裝置 34内之主控制态26之訊號組合器/多工器中組合。以此 方式可藉由使用諸如DSP編碼器及控制器27之附加DSP 衣置,將諸如MP3播放器44之未經修改之習知立體聲音訊 源添加至無線耳機系統1 0。 或者,可將包含於音訊源内用於其它目的(諸如關於數 位化音訊訊號之產生)之DSP裝置程式化,以提供為無線耳 機系統H)提供一額外頻道之資料所需要之控制及格式化。 詳言之’將新單元附加裝置54展示為一音訊源之實例,在 ^㈣中’為了與以下在本文中參看圖3描述之專屬格 式相令’已將所包含之DSP程式化。裝置54大體上包含線 5源56以&線6源58,兩者經由立體聲頻道電路6〇連接至 I06l24.doc 以供應用於訊號組合器/多工器 D S P編碼器及控制器2 8, 32 ° 類似地’藉由蚀田4 l # 使用啫如售型配接器(legacy adaPter)62之 舊型配接器,可蔣魅立> # f類比9讯裝置包含於無線耳機系統10 中0將舊型配接5| # aa & A人 ° 說月為包含線7類比音訊輸入64及線8 4比日輸/v 66 ’兩者連接至立體聲頻道電路68以供應用 於⑽編碼器及控制器3〇。應注意,表示為線i至線8之音 όίΐ輸入之任一者可gp啦·炎+ 〇 _ 對為立體聲輸入線,單獨用作獨立之 °°牮輸 或以立體聲與單聲輸入之任何其它便利組合或 作為諸如家庭影院5」或7.1系統之更複雜之音訊格式之部 刀使用如本文中其它處更具體地描述,線丨至線8之任何 —或多個亦可用以傳輸非音訊資料。 如圖1中所述,無線耳機系統10可包含一或多個數位音 Λ源,且亦可包含一或多個類比音訊源。如圖示,傳輸器 子系統〖2可包含諸如訊號組合器/多工器32之單數位訊號 組合器’對其饋送來自諸如Dsp編碼器及控制器24、27、 28及30之複數個DSP之每一者之數位訊號。將參看圖2在 下文中更具體地描述使用類比訊號輸入之傳輸器子系統12 之一替代組態》 仍參看圖1,IR傳輸器部分丨8中之IR傳輸器2〇自具有至 耳機接收器單元14中之IR接收器70之直接視線路徑(direct Hne of sight path)之便利位置產生表示為认訊號^之汛資 料之的數位位元流。在家庭影院應用中,可便利地將IR傳 輸器20定位於具有收聽者將所在之房間之清晰視圖的電視 106l24.doc 樞(TVcabmet)之頂部處。在車柄應用巾,可將m傳輪器 2〇定位於在乘客車庙之中心之圓頂燈中,或其可為安裝於 所要且可行之位置處(諸如圓頂燈附近)的獨立元件。在多 個耳機接收器單元u將由相同_輸㈣驅動之較大區域 中’ IR傳輸器部分18可包含複數個IR傳輸器2〇,其每一者 經便利地定位成具有至—或多個耳機接收器單元14的直接 視線路L。在其它實施例中,如參看圖η於其它處所述, 可提供IR傳輸中繼器,以在較長距離上或圍繞障礙物轉遞 由單-傳輸器20所傳輸之數位位元流,否則該等阻礙物可 阻擋自傳輸器20至耳機接收器單元14之任何—或多個之直 接視線。 在許夕應用中,IR接收器7〇之輸出可便利地由IR接收訊 戒處理窃72處理。在任一事件中,在被接收之後,汛訊號 1 6接著被應用於含有時脈、解多工器及控制器之解碼器 以供處理,以便為立體聲頻道丨_4提供獨立之數位訊號, 其將被應用於DSP 76以供處理。DSp 76可便利地為多工 DSP,以使得僅需要單—Dsp。或者,可提供複數個Dsp 單元或子單元。 立體聲音訊頻道1 _4均可被便利地處理為個別左頻道及 右頻道’從而傳輸如圖所示之頻道1L、2R、2L、2R、 3L、3R、4L及4R。應注意,如上所述,該等音訊頻道之 每一者可用作單一單聲音訊或資料頻道,或如本文中所示 加以,,且合以形成複數個子立體聲頻道(sub-plurality of stereo channels)。接著使所得音訊頻道可用於開關選擇器 106124.doc 1335154 7 8 ’以供選擇性地應用於大致表 (headphone headset earphone) °System) provides an infrared transmitter that can be connected to two stereo sources and will transmit different IR signals for each channel. The wireless headset has a channel a/b selector switch to allow the user of the headset to select between two channels. This system requires two separate stereo sources and relies on a light-emitting diode (led) that distinguishes between different frequencies (ie, colors) between the two audio channels. The system also requires the transmitter to be mounted at a location where the two signals propagating can be received at any location within the vehicle. Wireless video systems are also known. There is a need for a wireless communication system that includes one or more wireless receiving devices (such as earphones), wherein the system provides a plurality of wireless signals and other data for each of the respective receiving devices at ^=4亍<Good choices, ^, 谭, Tan. The system should occupy minimal space in the home or vehicle and should ideally be flexible enough to allow analog communication and digital communication and minimize interference between different signals transmitted with ^. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION A wireless audio distribution system may have a wireless transmitter that responds to a plurality of audio input channels for transmitting signals for carrying audio signals; and a receiver that responds to signals transmitted through the wheels for receiving (n) The local setting selector is used to select one or more of the audio input channels for regeneration. For example, the driver may selectively use an additional audio source such as a microphone to talk over the mobile phone or via a wireless master switch that can be used to change local settings (such as a sound channel or s-select) The audio distribution system notifies the passengers. These and other features and advantages will be apparent from the detailed description and the accompanying drawings. In the figures and description, the numerals indicate various features, and in the description of the drawings, like numerals indicate similar features. [Embodiment] Referring to FIG. 1, one embodiment of a disclosed wireless communication system is a wireless headset system 10 that includes a transmitter subsystem 12 that communicates with a headset unit 14 via an infrared (IR) or radio frequency (RF) signal 16. The signal 16 is preferably a formatted bit stream containing multi-channel digital audio data, correction data, and code or control data. The material being transmitted and received may be in accordance with industry standards such as the Infrared Data Association or IRDA for ir data communication or compatible with its 106l24.doc 1335154. Transmitter Subsystem 12 The IR Transmitter portion 18 includes an IR Transmitter 2 such as an Infrared Emitter-Like or LED that is received by one or more digital signal processors or DSPs (such as DSP encoders and controllers) The appropriate IR transmission driver 22 for digitizing the audio data of 24, 27, 28 and/or 3) is preferably according to any of the proprietary formats described below with reference to Figures 3, 1 and 16 To format the digital data stream provided by the IR transmitter portion 18. The plurality of such DSp encoding states and controllers can be self-assembled in the signal combiner/multiplexer 32, and the digitized audio data can be applied to the IR transmission driver 22, and the signal combiner/multiplexer 32 can be independently provided. With the IR transmitter section knife 1, 8 'and. Or together with the DSP encoder and controller 24, it is combined with the main controller 26. Main control & 26 may be included in a first audio device, such as an audio device as shown, provided as a stand-alone unit or included in transmitter portion 18. In a system configuration in which the main controller 26 is included in the audio device 34, the audio device 34, the IR transmitter portion 18, and the headset unit can advantageously serve as a single channel wireless headset system from the wireless headset system 1G. The base or input level system, according to the proprietary format described below with reference to Figures 3, 1 and 16 of the text, can be easily upgraded for use as a multi-channel wireless headset system. For purposes of illustration, the audio device 34 is depicted in the figure as containing an audio level % having f Μ two audio sources such as lines " original, 38 and line 2 sources 40, each of which is connected to a stereo channel, such as a stereo channel 1 Stereo processing circuit of circuit 42, the circuit 106124.doc 1335154 is applied to the main controller 26. The audio device 34 thus represents a mono radio and stereo radio, a cd and tape player, a fascination, a disc player, and other types of signals such as computers, televisions, DVD players, and the like. Any audio, video or data source in the audio portion of the electronic device. Whether included as part of an initial installation or later upgrade, a second source of audio such as MP3, WMA or other digital audio format player material can be included in the wireless headset system to provide a second channel stereo Audio signal. In particular, the Mp3 player 44 can be conveniently represented by the line 3 source 48 and the line 4 source 50 being provided to the audio stage 46 of the stereo channel circuit 52. The output of the stereo channel circuit 52 can be line output, speaker output or The headphones are out of the wheel. As shown in Figure i, the output of the stereo channel circuit 52 can be applied to the DSP encoder and controller 27 for combination in a signal combiner/multiplexer included in the main control state 26 of the audio device 34. In this manner, an unmodified conventional stereo audio source such as MP3 player 44 can be added to the wireless headset system 10 by using an additional DSP device such as a DSP encoder and controller 27. Alternatively, the DSP device included in the audio source for other purposes, such as the generation of digitized audio signals, can be programmed to provide the control and formatting required to provide the wireless headset system H) with an additional channel of data. In detail, the new unit attachment 54 is shown as an example of an audio source, and the included DSP has been programmed in ^(d) for the purpose of the specific format described below with reference to FIG. The device 54 generally includes a line 5 source 56 to & line 6 source 58, which is coupled to I06l24.doc via a stereo channel circuit 6〇 for supply to the signal combiner/multiplexer DSP encoder and controller 2 8. 32 ° similarly 'by Eclipse 4 l # using the old adapter of the legacy adaPter 62, can be jiangmeili> # f analog 9 device is included in the wireless headset system 10 Medium 0 will match the old type 5| # aa & A person ° said month is included line 7 class than audio input 64 and line 8 4 than day input / v 66 'both connected to stereo channel circuit 68 for supply (10) Encoder and controller 3〇. It should be noted that any of the sounds 表示 ΐ 表示 表示 表示 线 线 线 可 可 可 对 对 对 对 对 对 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声 立体声Other convenient combinations or use as a more sophisticated audio format such as Home Theater 5" or 7.1 systems, as described in more detail elsewhere herein, any one or more of the turns to line 8 may also be used to transmit non-audio data. As described in FIG. 1, wireless headset system 10 can include one or more digital audio sources and can also include one or more analog audio sources. As illustrated, the transmitter subsystem [2 can include a single digit signal combiner such as a signal combiner/multiplexer 32 that feeds a plurality of DSPs from, for example, Dsp encoders and controllers 24, 27, 28, and 30. The digital signal of each of them. The configuration of one of the transmitter subsystems 12 using analog signal input will be described in more detail below with reference to FIG. 2. Still referring to FIG. 1, the IR transmitter 2 in the IR transmitter section 〇8 is provided with a headphone receiver. The convenient location of the direct Hne of sight path of the IR receiver 70 in unit 14 produces a stream of digits of the data represented as the acknowledgment number. In a home theater application, the IR transmitter 20 can be conveniently positioned at the top of the television 106l24.doc pivot (TVcabmet) with a clear view of the room in which the listener will be located. In the handle application towel, the m-wheeler 2 can be positioned in a dome light in the center of the passenger car temple, or it can be a separate component mounted at a desired and feasible location, such as near a dome light. In a larger area where multiple earphone receiver units u will be driven by the same_trans (four), the 'IR transmitter portion 18' may comprise a plurality of IR transmitters 2, each of which are conveniently positioned to have up to - or more The direct view line L of the headphone receiver unit 14. In other embodiments, an IR transmission repeater may be provided to transfer the digital bit stream transmitted by the single-transmitter 20 over a long distance or around an obstacle, as described elsewhere with reference to FIG. Otherwise the obstructions may block direct line of sight from any one or more of the transmitter 20 to the earphone receiver unit 14. In the Xu Xi application, the output of the IR receiver 7 can be conveniently processed by the IR Receiver Handling 72. In either event, after being received, the signal 16 is then applied to the decoder containing the clock, demultiplexer, and controller for processing to provide a separate digital signal for the stereo channel 丨_4, It will be applied to the DSP 76 for processing. The DSp 76 can conveniently be a multiplexed DSP such that only a single-Dsp is required. Alternatively, a plurality of Dsp units or subunits may be provided. The stereo audio channels 1_4 can be conveniently handled as individual left and right channels' to transmit channels 1L, 2R, 2L, 2R, 3L, 3R, 4L and 4R as shown. It should be noted that, as described above, each of the audio channels can be used as a single single audio or data channel, or as shown herein, and combined to form a plurality of sub-plurality of stereo channels. ). The resulting audio channel is then made available to the switch selector 106124.doc 1335154 7 8 ' for selective application to the headphone headset earphone °

-般而言’收聽者可便利地使用開關選擇器78來選擇立 體聲頻道Μ之-,以將其應用於耳機⑽。或者,可使用 該等立體聲頻道之-或多個來提供—或兩個單聲頻道,立 可由收聽者選擇’或在特殊情況下在發生特定事件時即被 自動選擇《在該事件中,配備耳機8〇,以接收四個(或任 何其它數量之)立體聲音訊頻道,但較少數量之頻道可用 於由音訊裝置34進行之傳輸,可將正被傳輸之實際頻道之 數量倂入訊號16之數位位元流中,且耳機可接著允許使用 者僅選擇該等可用之頻道(例如,若僅兩個頻道正被傳 輸,則使用者將僅能夠在此等兩個頻道之間切換(t〇ggie) 而無需穿過兩個或兩個以上之”死"頻道)。In general, the listener can conveniently use the switch selector 78 to select the stereo channel to apply it to the headset (10). Alternatively, one or more of the stereo channels may be used to provide - or two mono channels, which may be selected by the listener' or, in special cases, automatically selected when a particular event occurs "in the event, equipped The headset is 8 〇 to receive four (or any other number of) stereo channels, but a smaller number of channels are available for transmission by the audio device 34, and the number of actual channels being transmitted can be entered into the signal 16 The digits are in the stream, and the headset can then allow the user to select only those channels that are available (eg, if only two channels are being transmitted, the user will only be able to switch between these two channels (t〇 Ggie) Without having to go through two or more "dead" channels.

不為耳機80之無線耳機 舉例而言,開關選擇器78可經組態以允許收聽者選擇諸 如頻道1-3之三個立體聲頻道之一,而立體聲頻道礼可用 以提供單聲電話頻道,且頻道411可用以提供諸如前門監控 。。或嬰兒監控器之音訊訊號。例如,在嬰兒監控器之情況 下,開關選擇器78可經組態以自動更動收聽者對該等立體 聲頻道之一的選擇,以在嬰兒監控器頻道中之音訊位準超 過預設位準之任何時候選擇嬰兒監控器音訊。此外,在嬰 兒監控器頻道中之音訊位準不再超過預設位準之後的固定 或可調節之時段後’開關選擇器78可經組態以自動返回到 收聽者早先所選擇之立體聲頻道。 或者,可利用立體聲頻道1_3來提供諸如用於家庭及專 106124.doc 13 業々Ik之5,1格式之音訊格式。在此類型之格式中,使用 第一立體聲頻來提供位於正被顯示之視訊之左及右方的一 前方立體聲聲源。類似地,可使用第二立體聲頻道來提供 位於收聽者左後方及右後方的一後方立體聲聲源。所謂之 第五頻道可為單聲頻道,其提供位於左前方與右前方立體 聲,之間的—中心位置處之一非立體聲聲源。表示所謂之 π.ι"頻道之另一單聲頻道可便利地為低頻低音揚聲器 (:〇〇㈣或子低音揚聲器頻道’由於正呈現之較低音訊頻 率其貫際位置可並非很關鍵。類似地,可利用立體聲頻 道1-4來提供所謂之71音訊格式之音訊。 耳機80可便利地為一對耳機揚聲器,其經安裝以用於便 利定位於《者之耳朵料,尤其是與為允許複數個立體 聲或單聲頻道之使用者或自動或更動選擇而組態之無線耳 機系統10—起使用。耳機8〇可用於此組態中,以藉由合成 將音訊以諸如5,丨格式之格式呈現給收聽者。舉例而言, 可错由組合左前方及右前方頻道之部分來合成5ι格式之 中心頻道。 或者,如下文中參看圖5所述,可使用耳機8〇之替代組 態來藉由提供安裝於收聽者耳朵附近之適當位置中之複數 對耳機揚聲器來提供對特定格式之更良好之重現 (rendition)。舉例而言,可將第一對揚聲器定位於前向位 置中,以再生左前方及右前方頻道並合成中心頻道,可將 第二對揚聲器定位於後向位置中,以再生左後方及右後方 頻道,其中使用安裝至一支撐揚聲器之頭帶之諧振室來提 106124.doc 14 1335154 供子低音揚聲器(丨)頻道。 =再次參看圖!,亦可使用解碼器74來產生用於提 外功能之控制訊號。舉例而言,可將控制訊號倂入由: 裝置34傳輸之數位位元流中,用於誤差檢查、省電、^動 頻道選擇及如本文中直它虛张.+. ^ ^ Τ 處所述之其它特徵。除了提供至 DSP 76之音訊訊號,解碼器74亦可用&摇# # t +For example, instead of a wireless headset for headset 80, switch selector 78 can be configured to allow a listener to select one of three stereo channels, such as channels 1-3, while a stereo channel can be used to provide a monophonic channel, and Channel 411 can be used to provide such as front door monitoring. . Or the audio signal of the baby monitor. For example, in the case of a baby monitor, the switch selector 78 can be configured to automatically change the listener's selection of one of the stereo channels to exceed the preset level in the infant monitor channel. Select baby monitor audio at any time. In addition, switch selector 78 can be configured to automatically return to the stereo channel previously selected by the listener after the audio level in the infant monitor channel no longer exceeds a fixed or adjustable period of time after the preset level. Alternatively, the stereo channel 1_3 can be utilized to provide an audio format such as the 5, 1 format for home and business. In this type of format, the first stereo frequency is used to provide a front stereo sound source located to the left and right of the video being displayed. Similarly, a second stereo channel can be used to provide a rear stereo sound source located at the left and right rear of the listener. The so-called fifth channel can be a mono channel, which provides a monaural sound source at the center position between the left front and the right front stereo. Another mono channel representing the so-called π.ι" channel can conveniently be a low-frequency woofer (: 〇〇 (4) or sub-woofer channel' because its lower position is lower than the audio frequency being presented. The stereo channel 1-4 can be used to provide audio in a so-called 71-audio format. The earphone 80 can conveniently be a pair of earphone speakers that are mounted for convenient positioning of the ear material, especially with A plurality of stereo or mono channel users or a wireless headset system 10 configured for automatic or more selective selection. The headset 8 can be used in this configuration to synthesize audio in a format such as 5, 丨The format is presented to the listener. For example, the central channel of the 5ι format can be synthesized by combining the left front and right front channels. Alternatively, as described below with reference to Figure 5, an alternative configuration of the headset 8 can be used. Providing a better rendition of a particular format by providing a plurality of pairs of earphone speakers mounted in appropriate locations near the listener's ear. For example, Positioning the speaker in the forward position to reproduce the left front and right front channels and synthesizing the center channel, the second pair of speakers can be positioned in the backward position to regenerate the left rear and right rear channels, wherein the mounting is used to a support The head of the speaker has a resonant chamber to provide 106124.doc 14 1335154 for the subwoofer (丨) channel. = Referring again to the figure!, the decoder 74 can also be used to generate a control signal for the external function. For example, The control signal can be input into the digital bit stream transmitted by the device 34 for error checking, power saving, channel selection, and other features as described herein. +. ^ ^ Τ In addition to the audio signal provided to the DSP 76, the decoder 74 can also use & shake # # t +

Jr用以如供功率控制訊號 «2 ’以供應用於電池系統 ,+. ^ ^ 》之,回應對其它處所論Jr is used to supply power control signal «2 ' for battery system, +. ^ ^ 》, responding to other premises

以之專屬格式中所含之程式碼的解碼,解碼器74可提供諸 如功率控制訊號82之訊號’其保持來自電池系統Μ之電池 功率應用於無線耳㈣統1()。其後,當在適當之時段内未 接收到編碼訊號時,電池改良將不再應W統1(),以提 供-自動化自動關閉(a.off)特徵,其在音訊訊號源或至 少格式化訊號不再存在時關閉系統1〇以保留電池功率。此 特徵可便利地用於其中系統1〇用於汽車中的應用令。當汽 車之點火裝置已關閉時,為了保留電池壽命,停止自電池 系統84應用於耳機接收器單元14之功率。如其它處所論 述,當誤差檢查特徵偵測到預定數量之誤差時,亦可調用 自動化自動關閉特徵。 現參看圖2,在一替代實施例中,傳輸器子系統"可組 態有單一 DSP以將音訊訊號數位化,該單一 Dsp經程式化 以提供訊號組合及格式控制功能。詳言之,至灰傳輸器部 分18之輸入可直接由一適當組態之DSp解碼器及控制器24 提供’其接收來自分別由立體聲積體電路或IC 42、52、 60及68所提供之立體聲頻道i、2、3及4之類比音訊訊號對 106l24.doc 15 1335154 作為其輸入。作為使用DSP之替代,亦可使用用 文中所述之功能之任何可行構件,其包含諸”㈣= wc(特殊應用積體電路)之任何其它電子電路。 易於理解,在此說明書中通篇使用術語DSP。…、,為 用於音訊級36中之立體聲頻道電路仏之 便利地為線1源3 8及音气 輸入源可 9 I級36。用於MP3播放器44中之立 μ聲頻道電路52之立體聲輸人源可為由音訊級μ提供之線 3源48及線4源50。類似地’用於新單元附加裝置μ及舊型 配接器62中之立體簦瓶;蓄φ 體卓頻道電路60及68之立體聲輸入源可分 別為線5源56及線6源58以及線7類比音訊輸人μ與線8類比 音afl輸入66。重要的是注音, ^ 心 了組合所有四個立體聲源以Decoding of the code contained in the proprietary format, decoder 74 can provide a signal such as power control signal 82 which maintains battery power from the battery system for wireless ear (4). Thereafter, when the encoded signal is not received within the appropriate time period, the battery modification will no longer be performed (1) to provide an automated auto-shutdown (a.off) feature, which is at the audio signal source or at least formatted. Turn off System 1 when the signal no longer exists to preserve battery power. This feature can be conveniently used in applications where the system 1 is used in a car. When the ignition of the vehicle has been turned off, the power applied to the earphone receiver unit 14 from the battery system 84 is stopped in order to preserve battery life. As discussed elsewhere, the automated auto-shutdown feature can also be invoked when the error check feature detects a predetermined amount of error. Referring now to Figure 2, in an alternate embodiment, the transmitter subsystem " can be configured with a single DSP to digitize the audio signal, the single Dsp being programmed to provide signal combining and format control functions. In particular, the input to the gray transmitter portion 18 can be provided directly by a suitably configured DSp decoder and controller 24 'which is received from the stereo integrated circuit or ICs 42, 52, 60 and 68, respectively. Analog audio signals such as stereo channels i, 2, 3, and 4 are 106l24.doc 15 1335154 as their inputs. As an alternative to using a DSP, any feasible means of function described herein may be used, including any other electronic circuit of "(4) = wc (special application integrated circuit). Easy to understand, throughout this specification The term DSP...., is conveniently used for the stereo channel circuitry in the audio stage 36. The line 1 source 3 8 and the tone input source can be the 9 I stage 36. The vertical mu channel in the MP3 player 44 The stereo input source of circuit 52 can be line 3 source 48 and line 4 source 50 provided by audio stage μ. Similarly 'for stereo add-on in new unit attachment device μ and old adapter 62; The stereo input sources of the body channel circuits 60 and 68 can be line 5 source 56 and line 6 source 58 and line 7 analog audio input μ and line 8 analog afl input 66. What is important is the phonetic, ^ heart combined all Four stereo sources

提供諸如5 · 1之福雜坎式舶_ @ A ,·格式所南之曰訊訊號,或該等立體聲 頻道之一或多個可用作多個音訊頻道。 現參看圖3,更具體地展示IR訊號16之格式或結構。汛 訊號16形成含有用於四個立體聲頻道之數位化音訊資料之 數位貢料以及各種校正及控制資料的一位元流。在一實施 例中訊號16為頻率或速率至少為1〇.4廳之數位資料 之未壓縮流。較佳使用脈衝位置調變(ppM)編碼。藉由使 用脈衝在時間或序列中之位置來傳送資訊或資料,此編碼 增加實際上傳輸之脈衝之功率位準’而不會實質上增加正 被傳輸之甙號之平均功率位準。因為在ppM編碼中,載運 於未編碼數位位元流中在處於第—功率位準之一對位元中 之相同量的資訊可由用於四個可能位元位置之—中的單一 位元來傳送(在四個脈衝位置調變或ppM 4編碼之情況 I06124.doc 16 1335154 下),此省電發生。以此方式,在脈衝位置編碼時傳輸之 單一位元中之功率位準可為未編碼位元流令之該等位元對 之母一者之位準的兩倍,而平均功率位準保持不變。 如圖3中所示,IR訊號16包含由可便利地僅為全部由零 形成之1 6位元字組之間隙1 〇 〇彼此分離之複數個經傳輸之 訊號(或如本文中其它處所述之封包)86。如下文中參看圖4 更具體地描述,間隙1 〇〇可用於傳送用於使接收器解碼與 傳輸器之時脈速率同步之時脈資訊。 可將經傳輸之訊號或封包8 6便利地為分割為兩個部分, 如圖示,標頭部分87及資料部分88。資料部分88可便利地 包括8個音訊資料流之每一者之25個樣本,該等音訊資料 流包含於正被處理之四個立體聲訊號中。舉例而言,資料 部分88可包含表示立體聲頻道丨左之取樣數位輸出之字組 1〇3,而字組ι〇4表示立體聲頻道1右之取樣數位輸出,接 著是剩餘3個立體聲頻道之表示。首先描述之此組8個數位 子”且表示單一樣本,且接著是所有8個音訊訊號之另外2 4 組序列樣本。在此實例中,每一資料部分88包含4〇〇個數 位字纽以提供音訊資料之25個樣本。若包含於圖工中所示 之DSP編碼器及控制器24内之類比數位或a/d轉換功能之 貝料速率為16位元,則用於每一頻道之第一 8位元字組因 此可表不每一樣本之高位元部分,而第二8位元字組可表 不該樣本之低位元部分。 現亦參看圖1,若操作開關選擇器78以選擇諸如頻道3左 之特定單聲或立體聲頻道,則可利用樣本之已知次序來減 I06l24.doc 1335154 少耳機接收器單元14之能量預算(energy budget)。詳言 之’僅在諸如頻道3左之所選音訊或立體聲頻道所需之時 間,可在每一資料部分88期間執行數位類比(D/A)轉換。 以此方式,因為未對所有8個單聲頻道或4個立體聲頻道執 行D/A轉換,所以可實質上減少D/A轉換所消耗之功率(通 常為能量或電池系統預算之實質部分),進而延長電池及/ 或電池充電壽命。 •- ..........—〜。—只,η呷侧议个河來Providing a signal such as 5·1 of the 杂 坎 _ _ @ A, · Format South, or one or more of these stereo channels can be used as multiple audio channels. Referring now to Figure 3, the format or structure of the IR signal 16 is shown in more detail.汛 Signal 16 forms a one-bit stream containing digital tributaries for digital audio data for four stereo channels and various correction and control data. In one embodiment, signal 16 is an uncompressed stream of digital data having a frequency or rate of at least 1 〇.4 hall. Pulse position modulation (ppM) coding is preferred. By transmitting information or data using the position of the pulse in time or sequence, the code increases the power level of the actually transmitted pulse' without substantially increasing the average power level of the nickname being transmitted. Because in ppM encoding, the same amount of information carried in an uncoded bit stream in a bit in the first power level can be used by a single bit in the four possible bit positions. Transmission (in the case of four pulse position modulation or ppM 4 coding I06124.doc 16 1335154), this power saving occurs. In this way, the power level in a single bit transmitted during pulse position encoding can be twice the level of the uncoded bit stream of the pair of bits, and the average power level is maintained. constant. As shown in FIG. 3, the IR signal 16 includes a plurality of transmitted signals separated from each other by a gap 1 可 which is conveniently only for all of the 16-bit blocks formed by zero (or other locations as herein). Said the package) 86. As described in more detail below with reference to Figure 4, gap 1 〇〇 can be used to transmit clock information for synchronizing the receiver with the clock rate of the transmitter. The transmitted signal or packet 86 can be conveniently divided into two portions, as shown, header portion 87 and data portion 88. The data portion 88 can conveniently include 25 samples of each of the 8 audio streams, the audio streams being included in the four stereo signals being processed. For example, the data portion 88 can include a string 1 〇 3 representing the sampled digital output of the stereo channel , left, and the word ι 〇 4 indicates the sampled digital output of the stereo channel 1 right, followed by the representation of the remaining 3 stereo channels. . This set of 8 digits is described first and represents a single sample, followed by an additional 24 samples of all 8 audio signals. In this example, each data portion 88 contains 4 digits of digits. Provides 25 samples of audio data. If the analog-to-digital or a/d conversion function included in the DSP encoder and controller 24 shown in the drawing is 16 bits, it is used for each channel. The first 8-bit block can therefore represent the high-order portion of each sample, and the second 8-bit block can represent the lower-order portion of the sample. Referring now also to Figure 1, if the switch selector 78 is operated Selecting a specific mono or stereo channel such as channel 3 left, you can use the known order of the samples to reduce the energy budget of the earphone receiver unit 14. The details are 'only in channel 3'. The time required to select the selected audio or stereo channel to the left can perform a digital analog (D/A) conversion during each data portion 88. In this way, since not all 8 mono channels or 4 stereo channels are performed D/A conversion, so it can be essentially Reduce the power consumed by D/A conversion (usually the energy or the substantial part of the battery system budget), thereby extending battery and / or battery charging life. - - .......... - ~. - Only, η呷 side of the river

容易地改變本文中所述之資料區塊92之組織。具體參看圖 3,在一實施例中’每一經傳輸之封包86可包含定位於資 料部分88之前之標頭部分87。每一標頭部分87可包含一或 多個校正部分101及控制碼部分102。一般而言,校正部分 101可提供時序資料、訊號量值資料、音量及/或頻率資料 以及(例如)關於音訊格式或其它聲學資訊之控制資料。控 制碼部分102可包含用於誤差偵測及/或校正、自動化頻道 選擇、自動化關閉電源及系統10之其它特徵之資訊。於= 文中之其它處參看圖12描述另一較佳實施例。 在特定安裝中’可為收聽者合成傳輸器子系統η之安 位置之所要聲學特徵或實際聲學特徵或考慮該等特徵4 ,而言,可在校正資料中表示特定音樂廳或其它 : =位置,其包含各種聲源或揚聲器至收聽者之方位角及 離,因此可藉由調節頻道之間的相 接•哭--,^ Τ <遲而為使用耳機 裔早疋14之收聽者合成關於該 驗。兮望, 日乐繼之適當聲學體 驗。"技術類似於用以建立諸如5 干體 式之特疋音訊格 106l24.doc 1335154 式之技術。 或者,可藉由適當使用校正資料來減 機so之聲學障壁之不 了穿透耳 1 E , 艮i予特徵,諸如引擎之高音調嗚鳴 ^二路或飛機噪音之低音調隆隆聲。此合成或聲音修改 M 正部分⑻之校正部分或m訊號16中之f訊來 =:!,及/或(如圖1中所示)由收聽者藉由適當操作 開關選擇益78來控制或調節。 類似地’可增強或補償不同類型或風格之耳機80之聲學 驗。習知耳機單元通常包含一對個別揚聲器,諸如如圖 1中所示之左耳揚聲器81及右耳揚聲器83。耳機8卜更複 雜版本,諸如於下文中參看圖5更具體地描述之 機丨】8’可受益於校正部分%中所包含之校正資料。 部t上所述,用於調節使用者之聲學體驗之技術可由校正 ‘刀⑻内之資料及/或藉由操作開關選擇器78加以輔助, 且亦由控制碼部分丨〇2中 變。护制“之資枓加以控制、調節或影 J ”料⑽亦可用於控料、統Μ之其它操作 如電池系統84之白#λ μ μ l & 之自動關閉功能、誤差偵測及/或校正 電及自動化可用頻道選擇。 八:見參看圖4、圖5及圖丨,可經由解碼器7锡諸如資料部 分88之經處理之^ 、The organization of the data block 92 described herein is readily altered. Referring specifically to Figure 3, in one embodiment, each transmitted packet 86 can include a header portion 87 positioned prior to the data portion 88. Each header portion 87 can include one or more correction portions 101 and a control code portion 102. In general, the correction portion 101 can provide timing data, signal magnitude data, volume and/or frequency data, and, for example, control information regarding audio formats or other acoustic information. Control code portion 102 can include information for error detection and/or correction, automated channel selection, automated power down, and other features of system 10. Another preferred embodiment is described with reference to Figure 12 elsewhere in the text. In a particular installation, the desired acoustic or actual acoustic characteristics of the location of the listener's composite transmitter subsystem η may be considered, or a particular concert hall or other may be represented in the calibration data: = position It contains a variety of sound sources or speakers to the azimuth and separation of the listener, so by adjusting the interface between the channels • crying -, ^ Τ < late to use the earphones About the test. Look forward to the appropriate acoustic experience of the Japanese music. The " technique is similar to the technique used to create a special type of audio signal, such as the 5 dry type, 106l24.doc 1335154. Alternatively, the acoustic barrier can be reduced by properly using the correction data to penetrate the ear 1 E, such as the high pitch of the engine, or the low-pitched ruff of the aircraft noise. The composite portion of the composite or sound modification M positive portion (8) or the m signal in the m signal 16 ==!, and/or (as shown in FIG. 1) is controlled or controlled by the listener by appropriate operation of the switch 78. Adjustment. Similarly, the acoustics of headphones 80 of different types or styles can be enhanced or compensated. Conventional earphone units typically include a pair of individual speakers, such as left ear speaker 81 and right ear speaker 83 as shown in FIG. A more complex version of the headset 8, such as that described in more detail below with reference to Figure 5, can benefit from the correction material contained in the correction portion %. As described on section t, the technique for adjusting the user's acoustic experience may be assisted by correcting the data in the 'knife (8) and/or by operating the switch selector 78, and also by the control code portion 丨〇2. The protection of the "management to control, adjust or shadow J" material (10) can also be used for control, other operations such as the battery system 84 white #λ μ μ l & automatic shutdown function, error detection and / Or correct the power and automation available channel selection. Eight: See Fig. 4, Fig. 5 and Fig. 丨, which can be processed via the decoder 7 tin, such as the data portion 88,

_ . . I 86中之1R賢料便利地應用於DSP 二供轉換為類比音訊資料。標頭部分π中之 =目的由包含於解碼器74内或與解碼 它電路進一步處理。 T您八 為了用於自動關閉功能中,可將由包含控制碼部分⑽ I06I24.doc 19 1335154 之IR接收訊號處理器72處理之IR資料之部分應用於程式碼 偵測器106,以偵測預定程式碼或其它唯一識別碼之存 在。一偵測到適當之程式碼,便可將延遲計數器1〇8設定 為諸如30秒之預定延遲。一收到所選程式碼之另一偵測, 便可接著將延遲計數器108重設為預定延遲。預定延遲一 到期,意即,預定延遲一到期且辨識到預選自動關閉控制 字組,便可將訊號傳送至中斷開關(kU1 switch)n〇,其接 著將功率控制訊號8 2發送至電池系統8 4以關閉耳機單元 14 ° 如其它處所述,系統10可倂入誤差偵測方法。在該實施 中,自動關閉功能亦可經組態以在已偵測到預定數量石_ . . I of the 1R is conveniently used in DSP for conversion to analog audio data. The destination in the header portion π is destined for inclusion in the decoder 74 or further processed by the decoding circuit. In order to be used in the auto-shutdown function, the portion of the IR data processed by the IR receive signal processor 72 including the control code portion (10) I06I24.doc 19 1335154 can be applied to the code detector 106 to detect the predetermined program. The presence of a code or other unique identifier. As soon as the appropriate code is detected, the delay counter 1 〇 8 can be set to a predetermined delay such as 30 seconds. Upon receipt of another detection of the selected code, the delay counter 108 can then be reset to a predetermined delay. The predetermined delay expires, that is, after the predetermined delay expires and the pre-selected automatic shutdown control block is recognized, the signal can be transmitted to the interrupt switch (kU1 switch) n〇, which then sends the power control signal 8 2 to the battery. System 8 4 closes the earphone unit 14 ° As described elsewhere, system 10 can incorporate an error detection method. In this implementation, the auto-shutdown function can also be configured to detect a predetermined number of stones

在操作中,上述程序用以關閉耳機單元14之電池功率, 除非在前6G秒内已辨識到適當程式碼訊號。自動關閉功能 因此可經組態以在停止由傳輸器子系統12進行之準確灰資 料傳輸之後60秒(或任何其它預定時段)後關閉電池功率。 或類型之誤差後關閉電池功率。此方法提供有利之自動 :功能’其可用以藉由在關閉汽車中之無線電或其它傳】 器(可能藉由關閉汽車之點火裝置)之後預定時段後,或 者/另外當過多傳輸/接收誤差已使音訊效能降級至不可 又之%度日守,關閉耳機而節省耳機電池功率。耳機單元 亦可經組態以僅在-偵測到過多誤差時便斷電(P〇w down),其中所有處 β、 勺柃止,且以預定時間間隔(例如: /、重啟’以接收預定數量之封⑽並檢查此等所接從 包中之誤差。耳機單开、佳 ^ , At 早凡14可進一步經組態以在接收無誤 I06124.doc -20* 1335154 =低於預選數量之誤差的預選數量之封包 始几全、恆定之操作。 旦在有利之核式中’若因此所需之功率為可接受之最小 I理17中2斷開關11。亦可用以藉由維持應用於1 r接收訊號 、延遲計數器108及程式碼債測器⑽之功率以相 同^式提供自動開啟(aut。’)功能。_啟動作為傳輸器子 統12之部分之適當訊號源,便可偵測到預定程式碼訊號 =功率控制訊號82發送至電池系統84,卩開啟耳機接收 裔早70 14中仍未通電之系統。 再次參看圖1及圖4,在維持系統10之適當操作時之一重 要^務在於维持操作之間的同步,尤其是傳輸器子系統12 之取樣及/或A/D操作與耳機接收器單元14之解碼及相關操 :之間的同步。儘管可以數個不同方式維持时,但是已 發現其尤其有利於用於包含可能之複數個電池供電遠程單 元或接收器單元(諸如耳機單元⑷之系統(諸如系統1〇) 中,來使耳機接收器單元14之操作之時序與由傳輸器子單 元12提供且包含於IR訊號16内之時序資訊同步,以確保對 有寺可被替代或在汽車之間移動之多個接收器單元準確達 成同步。 仍參看圖4及圖5,自IR接收訊號處理器72將汛資料應用 於同步偵測器H2,同步偵測器112可藉由(例如)偵測^定 之所傳輸封包86 t之資料部分88之後邊緣來便利地谓測間 隙1 00,並在一適當預選延遲或間隙之後偵測隨後傳輸之 封包86之標頭部分87之前邊緣。或者可由同步谓測器η] I06l24.doc 2! 丄335154 精由組合關於後邊緣、間隙長度及/或諸如全丨或全0或其 • 物之所期望資料内容及間隙及/或前邊緣之實際或期 望長度的資訊來執行此同步訊號偵測之簡單變體。 —偵測到適當之同步資料,同步偵測器112便可接著藉 由凋即時脈而為耳機接收器單元14維持適當之時脈資訊, ° 也藉由更新諸如PLL 114之鎖相迴路電路(或而 、准持同步。接著可將PLL 114之輸出應用於Dsp %,以供 _ ^列如)藉由控制DSP 76之D/A轉換功能之時脈速率而使汛 資料之解碼及/或取樣同步。接著由開關選擇器78將所得 已同步訊號應用於耳機8〇。若沒有此同步,則由耳機⑼產 生之聲音之音訊品質可嚴重降級。 解碼益74可提供之另—功能包含更新耳機接收器單元14 之操作6羊έ之,程式碼偵測器1 06 —辨識到適當之更新 程式碼’程式碼偵測器1〇6便可將來自一或多個隨後傳輸 2訊號或封包86之資料部分88中之資料應用於耳機接收器 早το 14中之適當記憶體,諸如可重寫記憶體⑴。(例如 碼盗74接者可使用儲存於記憶體116中之資料來控制 接收器單元14之隨後操作。 碼 上文中參看圖4於所述之更新功能可用以修改 機接收器單元14 ’以供操作改變多個頻道格式中(諸如 二它了二式:之隻化)之貧料之處理的模式1新格式 ,、匕用途可在於自動選擇各種音訊頻道上 或年齡適當格式,以控制提供給特定收聽者之内容之^ 舉例而言,於博物館中可使料統⑽為―或多個展品 I06124.doc -22· ^35154 提供呈音訊格式之資訊。在將特定耳機接收器單元14提供 給博物館參觀者或由其租賃之前,可藉由使用更新格式將 。亥耳機早元程式化,從而為將使用該耳機單元之收聽者提 供年齡適當之音訊。 -a 叫貝^吁俄早兀便—]机q又啊,从對愿聆得提 供之音訊服務。可將特定耳機程式化為一收到足以指示與 待A述之展品之接近度的量值之音訊訊號便自動啟動。可 將耳機程式化為僅為某—集合中之展品提供音訊,而可將 其它耳機程式化為接收所有有關音訊。在對每-耳機之粗 賃或其它分配時可容易地執行此程式化或更新。 更新或程式化功能之另_㈣為同時允許更大數量之耳 〃之重新程式化。舉例而言’繼續使㈣物館實例,傳呼 急或其它通知系統可實施有更新功能,以使得可 選擇('生地將諸如博物館關閉 ± ㈣關閉時間或宣佈緊急事件(諸如火 中且右m 4 ㈣,、體貝則專呼或通知給其耳機 中具有所選程式碼之博物館管理員或所有該等管理員。以 此方式,稭由可控地切換已產 音訊而非藉由改變土… & &多個所選耳機中之 井精由改變正常產生之音訊, 介面即時提供該資訊。 “電活或傳呼 升級功症之用途之另一實例可為改變 備之操作之程式碼,以防止盜竊或損壞耳冑 有關設 如車輛之收聽室不適杂 機。可將正自諸 便對收聽者或其它人發出警 為-穿過出口 該等操作,謂意或„地改壞耳機來阻止 I06l24.doc -23· 1335154 升、’及力月b之另一用途為允許出售或提供耳機單元用於一 階層上並稍後升級至更高階層之操作。作為一簡單實例, I分配多頻道耳機而無需執行多頻道操作所需之編碼。儘 管此等耳機對於單頻道操作為良好的,但是一支付適當費 用便可為了更高效能而暫時或永久將其升級。 現參看圖5,描述與系統10一起使用之多頻道耳機ιι8之 俯視圖及正視圖,其中將左耳機系統12〇及右耳機系統122 安裝於用以將耳機定位於收聽者頭上的頭帶124上。該等 耳機系統之每一者包含複數個揚聲器,諸如如與有效孔 132及有效音訊路徑134—同表示於右耳機系統122上之前 方揚聲器126、中央揚聲器128及後方揚聲器13〇。 控制每-耳機中自揚聲器126、⑵及⑶至有效孔132沿 有效音訊路徑134之視距離(aPParem diStance)來提供所要 之音訊體驗,以使得視方位角方向及每—作為聲源之揚聲 益與收聽者之間的距離均與所要之體驗一致。舉例而言, 由揚聲器126及128提供之音訊可提供於稍不同之時間「其 在聲音之前邊緣及後邊緣上具有不同重點,以使得可合成 聲源之間的視空間關係,以使家庭影院格式化效能之效果 加倍。儘管對於某些類型之聲音(如高頻率滴答聲)之空間 關係可比對於其它類型之聲音之空間關係更易於合成,作 ,耳機中之空間聲音關係之均勾部分合成之效果令人驚 奇’且其提供增強之音訊體驗。 除了上述用於立體聲及多頻道立體聲格式t之揚聲器以 外’可有利地將低頻、非定向之單聲源(諸如子低音揚聲 I06l24.doc -24- 1335154 器丨34)安裝至頭帶124上,以增強使用者之音訊體驗β 現參看圖6,音訊傳輸裝置500包含可接收四個數位化音 訊輸入流602、603、604、605之單一 DSP 600,該等數位 化音訊輸入流602、603、604、605由兩個多工器606、608 多工化為兩個訊號610、612,以供輸入至連接至dsp 600 之序列埠(serial port)6i3、615的直接記憶體存取(!)]^八)緩 衝器DMA0 614及DMA 1 616中。位於(例如)圖7中所示之音 讯模組622、623、624、625中之類比數位轉換器 (ADC)618、619、620、621可將音訊流 602-605數位化。圖 1之音訊裝置34及MP3播放器44為該等音訊模組之典型實 例°如上文中參看圖5所述,可使用利用提供給單一 aDC 之多個類比輸入以及直接提供給諸如多工器6〇6、6〇8之多 工器之多個數位輸入的音訊裝置。 參看圖7 ’音訊傳輸裝置500之資料多工電路將數位化資 料602、603與604、605之兩個頻道分別組合為一序列資料 k 6 1 0 6 12。組合用於兩個經不同定相之數位音訊立體聲 對(兩個立體聲對)610、612之資料流時隙(Sl0t),以產生怪 定之數位資料流633。本文中其它處更具體地描述之用於 音訊模組之左/右計時機制經組態以使得兩個立體聲頻道 (四個類比音讯輸入線)共用一資料線。用9 0度相移資料來 多工化(multiplex)同相 ADC 618、620 與 619、621 之輸出 602、603與604、005。將較高次序之頻道(頻道3及4)計時 為與較低頻道(頻道丨及2)異相9〇度。此允許兩個頻道對(頻 道1左與右及頻道3左與右)共用單一資料線。將兩組序列 106124.doc •25- 1335154 數位化音訊資料輸入至DSP 600。奇數編號之頻道均位於 相同序列線上,且偶數編號之頻道均位於相同序列線上。 時脈及時脈定相電路628提供多工器606、608之輸入資料 線選擇。 繼續參看圖7 ’ DSP 600與多工器606、608—同可提供於 傳輸器500内之編碼器626中。編碼器626自音訊模組622、 623、624、625接受四個數位化音訊輸入602、603、604、 605並使用線驅動器63 1來將數位化序列資料流633發送至 IR傳輸器模組634,以供傳輸至耳機80。 編碼器626亦包含時脈及時脈定相電路628、啟動(boot)/ 私式記憶體630及電源632。DSP 600充當用於編碼器626電 路之中央控制’其包含對音訊傳輸裝置5〇〇之所有輸入及 輸出之控制。提供於計時電路628内之計時除法器 (clocking divider)由DSP 600啟動,以提供用以驅動用於任 何音訊模組(例如ADC)之時脈及至DSP之音訊資料之訊 號。DSP 600組合來自兩個序列源(多工器6〇6、6〇8)之音 訊資料6 10、6 12,並將音訊資料格式化為資料封包之單一 序列資料流633 ’其被提供至線驅動器63 1以發送至IR傳輸 器634。在一實施例中,線驅動器63 1可為具有一 RS485收 發器之差異線驅動器,且可使用反相器來反轉並缓衝來自 DSP 600之資料。DSP 600使用由該DSP内部之鎖相迴路 (PLL)倍增的計時電路628之基礎10.24 MHz時脈。在一實 施例中,DSP時脈速度為8X MHz,但可降低此速度以便減 少由音訊傳輸裝置5〇〇消耗之整體功率消耗。 I06124.doc -26- 繼續參看圖7 ’啟動記憶體630在關閉期間為(含有控制 DSP之軟體之)DSP 600儲存程式記憶體^ 8位元序列電子可 擦可程式唯讀記憶體(EEPROM)可用作啟動記憶體630。一 對該DSP加電’便可將其程式化成為其啟動程式搜尋外部 5己憶體電路’以供其載入並開始執行。將啟動記憶體63〇 連接至DSP 600之多頻道緩衝序列埠6l5(McBSPl)。在替代 實施例中,DSP軟體可提供於DSP唯讀記憶體(ROM)中。 現參看圖8,時脈及時脈定相電路628產生編碼器626及 音訊模組622、623、624、625所需要之所有時脈。DSP、 音訊資料傳送及音訊數位化需要四個獨立時脈。此等時脈 係主時脈660、序列時脈66 1、左/右時脈662及多工器時脈 663。如先前參看圖6所述’多工器6〇6、608亦需要時脈定 位來多工化數位化音訊輸入流6〇2、603、604、605。使用 主日守脈660來驅動用於音訊數位化模組及dsp之主同步化 時脈訊號。主時脈訊號660自獨立型(stand-alone)晶體振盡 器電路660產生’且具有緩衝輸出661。主時脈頻率為 1 0.24 MHz ’其允許自主時脈得到序列時脈及左/右時脈。 使用序列時脈將來自音訊模組622、623、624、625之數位 化音訊輸入流602、603、604、605之每一個別位元計時 (clock)至DSP 600中。使用四分之一時脈除法器(〇ne f〇unh clock divider)667來產生頻率為2.56 MHz之計時訊號,從 而自主時脈得到序列時脈訊號661。 使用左/右時脈對來自多工器6〇6、608所產生用於輸入 至DSP 600之數位音訊資料流61〇、612之左及右資料字組 I06124.doc •27- 1335154 。十%,並產生DSP訊框同步。使用時脈除法器667來產生 頻率比主時脈慢256倍之訊號,從而自±時脈得到左/右時 脈訊號662。時脈定相電路668藉由為左/右時脈之一提供 9〇度相移而將左/右時脈分離為兩個相位。此允許四個音 汛杈組622、623、624、625之兩個產生9〇度相移輸出。用 在線上之90度相移資料來多工化同相左/右時脈音訊模 組輸出之輸出。每一左/右時脈相位充當用於來自音訊模 ”且622 623、624、625之數位化音訊輸入流6〇2、6〇3、 604、605之獨立訊框同步。 多工器邏輯使用多工器時脈663來觸發所選輸入資料 線,以組合來自音訊模組622、623、624、625之數位化音 訊輸入流602、603、6〇4、0〇5中之數位音訊封包。多工器 時脈訊號663亦由時脈除法器667產生。Dsp時脈訊號 用以驅動DSP 600,且藉由緩衝器/電壓轉換器669將主時 脈訊號660轉換至如DSp所需要之低電壓(例如自3 3 ^^至18 V)而產生。藉由改變基礎晶體振盈器頻率(意即,可將用 於40 KHz之左/右時脈之9.216 MHz基礎時脈改變為用於 44.1 KHz之左/右時脈之丨丨.2896 MHz基礎時脈),可使用其 它計時機制》 電源632產生編碼器626所需要之所有電壓。在一實施例 中,編碼器電源632可接受自+10 VDC至+18 VDC之輸入電 壓範圍。四個獨立電壓可用於傳輸器底板上;輸入電壓 (通常為+12 VDC)、+5 VDC、+3.3 VDC及+ 1.8 VDC。可使 用瞬變現象(transient)保護來防止輸入功率線上之任何渴 106124.doc Ί9. 浪或瞬變現象。亦可使用電壓監管器來維持DSP 600之穩 定性。使用未經調節之輸入電壓作為用於+5 VDC之源電 壓。使用經調節之+5 DVC來給IR傳輸器模組634供電。音 訊模組622、623、624、625對輸入音訊保護及輸入音訊位 準偏壓使用+5 VDC。IR傳輸器634對偏壓控制及IR驅動電 路65 0使用+5 VDC。經調節之+3.3 VDC用以給DSP 600及 編碼器626之邏輯供電,且亦提供給用於其ADC之音訊模 組。+3.3 VDC自經調節之+5 VDC電源電壓產生並由電壓 監管器所監控。若該位準降低至+3.3 VDC電源之10%以 下,則電壓監管器可保持DSP 600處於重設狀態,直至該 電壓已增加至+3.0 VDC以上之後已過去諸如200 ms之時 段。經調節之+1.8 VDC用以給編碼器626之DSP核心供 電,並自經調節之+3.3 VDC電源電壓產生。 現參看圖9,在一實施例中,可使用音訊模組622、 623 、 624 ' 625 )1等數位 4匕音 Ifl 輸入济L 602 、 603 、 604 、 605 提供至DSP 600。音訊模組可為編碼器626之外部或内部插 入(plug-in)模組,或可倂入編碼器中。在提供四個音訊頻 道之實施例中,四個音訊模組可與傳輸器底板一起使用。 諸如圖9中所示之音訊模組622之每一音訊模組接受輸入 63 8、639之一立體聲音訊對(左及右)。功率及主時脈、序 列時脈及左/右時脈均由編碼器626供給。可使用訊號調節 及輸入保護電路在數位化之前製備訊號63 8、639並保護輸 入電路不受瞬變現象影響。 可獨立調節訊號638、639。直流(DC)偏壓電路640將訊 I06l24.doc •29- 1335154 號638、639設定為五伏特電源之中間範圍,以便允許輸入 訊號在DC偏塵上為對稱的。以此方式,發生之任何削波 (clipping)將同等地發生於每一正峰值及負峰值上。可使用 輸入湧浪保護電路641來保護輸入電路不受瞬變現象及過 電壓條件的影響。訊號調節及輸入保護電路64〇中之兩個 背對背(back-to-back)之二極體可提供瞬變現象保護,以將 任何南電壓分路至電源及至地面。線階層輸人可限制為兩 伏特,或某一其它可行值(峰對峰)。可提供低通遽波器 來充當用以增加D/A内部濾波器之止帶衰減之預濾器。在 一實施例中,每一類比輸入音訊頻道頻率為20取至18 KHz,且低通濾波器642轉角頻率為14〇 κΗζ以上,以使得 其對音訊輸入之帶通的影響最小。 繼續參看圖9’使用ADC 643來將左及右類比輸入63卜 =9數位化。ADC 643將含有左及與右頻道之單序列數位 資料流602由輸出至編碼器626。使用1〇 24 MHz之主時脈 來產生用於ADC 643之時序,且使用2.56 M之1^序列資料 時脈來對來自該ADC之資料計時。使用4〇 KHz之左/右時 脈來將資料構造(frame)為不同之音訊樣本。每一左及右類 比樣本可為16位元值。 現參看圖ίο,ir傳輸器或模組634將數位資料流633轉換 為IR(紅外線)傳輸訊號16。ppM(脈衝位置調變)編碼用以 藉由使用位元位置值而增加傳輸器功率。ir傳輸器634包 3線接收斋650,其用以自線驅動器63丨接收差異RS485訊 號633亚將其轉換為單端資料流。接著緩衝該資料流並將 I06124.doc -30. 1335154 其傳遞至紅外線偏壓及控制電路650,該紅外線偏壓及控 制電路650驅動發射器652之該(等)發光二極體(led)並控 制所傳輸能量之量。IR傳輸器634包含四個紅外線偏壓及 控制電路650及四個個別發射器652,每一發射器652具有 25〇/〇之工作循環比(duty cycle)。當在資料流633中感測到 零位元時,偏壓控制將該(等)IR發射器維持於非常低之開 啟狀態,以允許當感測到正脈衝(一位元)時直接二極體驅 動立即將全部功率應用於IR發射器二極體β使用感測電阻 器來監控供給至二極體之電流之量,以使得當發射器二極 體驅動器受脈衝作用(pulsed)時,偏壓控制維持流經二極 體之恆定電流。IR發射器652使用任何可行數量(例如每IR 發射器四個)之IR發射器二極體將數位資料流633轉化為紅 外線能量之脈衝。歸因於二極體之實體特徵,電資料脈衝 之帶寬主要由應用於IR發射器二極體之方波脈衝之基本頻 率所限制。在一實施例中,可使IR能量聚焦於87〇 nM之中 心波長上。編碼器626將所有功率供給至IR傳輸器模組 634。+5 VDC用於驅動器及偏壓控制電路65〇。在—實施 例中’編碼器626以11.52 Mb/s之速度將PPM編碼數位資料 流633供給至ir傳輸器634。 現參看圖11’使用?^88?613、615及01^八614、616來 獨立地聚集四個立體聲(八個單聲)頻道之資料。當該等 McBSP之任一者已接收完整之16位元資料字組時,各個 DMA為總共四個保持緩衝器將資料字組傳遞至兩個保持緩 衝器 670、671(對於 DMA1 616)或 672、673(對於 DMA0 I06124.doc •31 · 1335154 614)之一中。每一河(;別1>613、615使用其自身之1)]^八 614、616及緩衝器對672/673、670/671來移動並儲存數位 化資料。在正填充一緩衝器的同時,DSP 600處理互補緩 衝器β每一緩衝器(為了總共1〇〇個16位元樣本)儲存來自兩 個不同ADC之二十五個左資料樣本及二十五個右資料樣 本。由母一 McBSP接收之每一字組使各個DMA之記憶體位 址遞增。當每一緩衝器為滿的時,自各個DMA發送中斷至 DSP 600。DSP 600重設DMA位址,且用一組新資料再次填 充其它緩衝器。持續重複此過程。 DSP 600產生均為完全傳輸封包86之大小的兩個傳輸緩 衝器。在一實施例中,每一封包中使用45〇個(16位元)字組 (如下文中更全面地論述)^當首先初始化一封包86時,將 靜態標頭/標尾(trailer)值插入該封包中。對於初始封包及 隨後封包’將控制區塊96之用戶ID/特殊選擇/頻道狀態 (USC)值 '資料偏移、動態標頭值及頻道音訊資料添加至 每一封包。較佳使用自先前封包音訊資料計算出之usc 值。對音訊資料進行PPM編碼並將其置放於資料區塊封包 中。一旦已處理來自每一頻道之預定數量(例如二十五個) 之樣本,封包86便是完整的。 當DSP 600完全填充該等輸出緩衝器之一時,賦能一傳 輸DMA(DMA2)。DMA2接著將經填充之輸出緩衝器中之資 料傳遞至傳輸裝置500之序列埠(MeBSPO)。MeBSPO又將序 列資料033發送至線驅動器63 i,以便發送至IR傳輸器 。一旦輸出DMA及McBSP被啟動,其便持續操作。在 I06l24.doc -32· 1335154 1335154 ♦ 搴 DSP 600填充該等緩衝器之一的同時,dMA2將另一緩衝器 由清空(empty)並將其發送至McBSPO。經由輸入資料維持 同步。 DSP 600處理來|DMA 614、616之中斷,監控如本文中 其它處所述之特殊選擇及頻道狀態資訊,建構每一個別訊 號(或傳輸封包)86,且組合並調變音訊資料及封包資訊。 DMA中斷用以通知DSP 6〇〇輸入音訊緩衝器為滿的,此 時,該DSP重新組態各個DMA以開始填充替代之保持緩衝 器並接著開始處理"滿的"保持緩衝器。無中斷用於輸出 DMA上。一旦輸出緩衝器為滿的,便啟動輸出dma開始 填充另一緩衝器。 如本文中其它處更全面地描述,可使用特殊選擇資訊來 指示音訊傳輸褒置別是否正用於唯—組態中且可經由硬 體開關提供還是可被硬式編碼(㈣⑶㈣)於勤體中。特殊 選擇可包含,但不限於,“及”環繞聲處理。在一實施 例中’可使用四位炎 一 位70笊^日不特殊選擇之狀態。四位元將提 供尚達四個使用者可误摆之關貼十古、去, 们選擇之開關或⑤達十五個硬式編碼之 特殊選擇。耳機正常操作可為表示W_h之保留選擇。 當使用開關選擇時’十五個特殊選擇之—或多個之最小 值將何用於額外選擇(意gp,若使用兩個開關,則僅四 特殊選摆η 4了用的。右使用四個開關,則無額外 符沐适擇可為可用 隸.壁摇 的)舉例而言,為了利壯環繞In operation, the above procedure is used to turn off the battery power of the headset unit 14 unless the appropriate code signal has been recognized within the first 6G seconds. The auto-shutdown function can therefore be configured to turn off battery power after 60 seconds (or any other predetermined period of time) after stopping the accurate gray data transmission by the transmitter subsystem 12. Turn off battery power after the type or error. This method provides an advantageous automatic: function 'which can be used after a predetermined period of time after turning off the radio or other transmitter in the car (possibly by turning off the ignition of the car), or / in addition, when excessive transmission/reception errors have been The audio performance is downgraded to a non-reconcilable % of the day, the headset is turned off and the headset battery power is saved. The headphone unit can also be configured to power down (P〇w down) only when too many errors are detected, where all β, scoops are stopped, and at predetermined intervals (eg: /, restart 'to receive The predetermined number of seals (10) and check the errors in these received packages. Headphones single open, good ^, At early 14 can be further configured to receive without error I06124.doc -20* 1335154 = lower than the pre-selected number The pre-selected number of errors begins with a full, constant operation. In a favorable nucleus, 'if the required power is the minimum acceptable, the second switch 17 can also be used for maintenance. The power of the 1 r receive signal, the delay counter 108, and the code detector (10) is automatically turned on (aut.') by the same type. _Starting the appropriate signal source as part of the transmitter 12 can detect The signal to the predetermined code = power control signal 82 is sent to the battery system 84, and the system that is still not powered by the earphones is received. Referring again to Figures 1 and 4, one of the important functions of maintaining the system 10 is important. ^ is to maintain synchronization between operations, especially It is the synchronization between the sampling and/or A/D operation of the transmitter subsystem 12 and the decoding and related operations of the earphone receiver unit 14. Although it can be maintained in several different ways, it has been found to be particularly advantageous for use. In a system comprising a plurality of battery powered remote units or receiver units, such as earphone unit (4), such as system 1 ,, the timing of operation of the headphone receiver unit 14 is provided by the transmitter subunit 12 and includes The timing information in the IR signal 16 is synchronized to ensure accurate synchronization of multiple receiver units that can be replaced or moved between cars. Still referring to Figures 4 and 5, the self-IR receiving signal processor 72 will The data is applied to the sync detector H2. The sync detector 112 can conveniently refer to the gap 100 by, for example, detecting the trailing edge of the data portion 88 of the transmitted packet 86 t, and appropriately preselecting After the delay or gap, the front edge of the header portion 87 of the subsequently transmitted packet 86 is detected. Alternatively, the synchronization predator η] I06l24.doc 2! 丄 335154 can be combined with respect to the trailing edge, the gap length and/or such as Or a simple variant of the synchronous signal detection performed by the information of the desired data content and the gap and/or the actual or desired length of the front edge of the 0 or its contents. - Detecting the appropriate synchronization data, synchronous detection The device 112 can then maintain appropriate clock information for the headphone receiver unit 14 by rushing the pulse, and also by updating the phase locked loop circuit such as the PLL 114 (or instead of holding the synchronization. The PLL 114 can then be used). The output is applied to Dsp% for the _^ column to synchronize the decoding and/or sampling of the data by controlling the clock rate of the D/A conversion function of the DSP 76. The resulting synchronized signal is then applied by switch selector 78 to earphone 8 。. Without this synchronization, the audio quality of the sound produced by the earphone (9) can be severely degraded. The other functions provided by the decoding benefit 74 include updating the operation of the earphone receiver unit 14 and the code detector 106 - recognizing the appropriate update code 'code detector 1 〇 6 The data from one or more of the data portions 88 of the subsequently transmitted 2 signal or packet 86 is applied to appropriate memory in the earphone receiver, such as rewritable memory (1). (For example, the code thief 74 can use the data stored in the memory 116 to control subsequent operations of the receiver unit 14. The code update function described above with reference to Figure 4 can be used to modify the machine receiver unit 14' for The operation of changing the mode 1 new format of the processing of the poor materials in the plurality of channel formats (such as the two: only), the use may be to automatically select various audio channels or age-appropriate formats to control the provision to For example, in the museum, the information (10) can be provided in the museum as "or multiple exhibits I06124.doc -22. ^35154." In the audio format, the specific earphone receiver unit 14 is provided. Before the museum visitors can rent it, they can use the updated format to program the earphones to provide the appropriate age for the listeners who will use the headphone unit. —] Machine q, ah, from the audio service provided by the wish. The specific headset can be programmed to automatically start an audio signal that is sufficient to indicate the proximity to the exhibit to be described. The headset is programmed to provide audio only for exhibits in a collection, and other headsets can be programmed to receive all relevant audio. This stylization or update can be easily performed for each of the headset's coarse or other allocations. Another (4) update or stylization feature is to allow a larger number of deafs to be reprogrammed at the same time. For example, 'continue to make (4) an instance of the library, paging or other notification system can be implemented with an update function to enable Choice ('The birthplace will close the museum (such as the closing time) or declare an emergency (such as in the fire and right m 4 (four), the body is called or notified to the museum administrator with the selected code in the headset or all that In this way, the straw is controlled to switch the produced audio instead of changing the soil... &&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&& Another example of the use of electrophysical or paging upgrades may be to change the code of the prepared operation to prevent theft or damage to the deafness. It is possible to warn the listener or other people from all over the place - through the exit of the operation, pretending or smashing the earphones to prevent I06l24.doc -23· 1335154 liters, 'and the other month b The purpose is to allow the sale or provision of a headset unit for use on a level and later upgrade to a higher level. As a simple example, I assign a multi-channel headset without the coding required to perform multi-channel operation. Single channel operation is good, but it can be temporarily or permanently upgraded for higher performance at a reasonable cost. Referring now to Figure 5, a top view and a front view of a multi-channel headset ιι8 for use with system 10 will be described. The left earphone system 12A and the right earphone system 122 are mounted on a headband 124 for positioning the earphones on the listener's head. Each of the headphone systems includes a plurality of speakers, such as the front speaker 126, the center speaker 128, and the rear speaker 13A on the right earphone system 122, as with the active aperture 132 and the active audio path 134. Controlling the distance between the speakers 126, (2) and (3) in the earphones to the effective aperture 132 along the effective audio path 134 (aPParem diStance) to provide the desired audio experience, so that the azimuth direction and each of the sound sources The distance between the benefit and the listener is consistent with the desired experience. For example, the audio provided by speakers 126 and 128 can be provided at a slightly different time "with different emphasis on the front and rear edges of the sound so that the spatial relationship between the sound sources can be synthesized to enable the home theater The effect of formatting performance is doubled. Although the spatial relationship for certain types of sounds (such as high-frequency ticks) can be more easily synthesized than the spatial relationship of other types of sounds, the spatial sound relationship in the headphones is synthesized. The effect is amazing' and it provides an enhanced audio experience. In addition to the above mentioned speakers for stereo and multi-channel stereo format t, it is advantageous to have a low frequency, non-directional single source (such as subwoofer I06l24.doc -24- 1335154 丨 34) is mounted to the headband 124 to enhance the user's audio experience. Referring now to Figure 6, the audio transmission device 500 includes four digitized audio input streams 602, 603, 604, 605. A single DSP 600, the digitized audio input streams 602, 603, 604, 605 are multiplexed into two signals 610, 612 by two multiplexers 606, 608 for input. Connected to the serial port 6i3, 615 of the dsp 600 direct memory access (!) ^ 8) buffer DMA0 614 and DMA 1 616. Located in (for example) the audio module shown in Figure 7. The analog digital converters (ADCs) 618, 619, 620, 621 of 622, 623, 624, 625 can digitize the audio streams 602-605. The audio device 34 and the MP3 player 44 of FIG. 1 are the audio modules. Typical Example As described above with reference to Figure 5, audio can be used using multiple analog inputs provided to a single aDC and multiple digital inputs directly to multiplexers such as multiplexers 6〇6, 6〇8 Referring to Figure 7, the data multiplexing circuit of the audio transmission device 500 combines the two channels of the digitized data 602, 603 and 604, 605 into a sequence of data k 6 1 0 6 12. The combination is used for two different A phased digital audio pair (two stereo pairs) 610, 612 data stream time slots (S10t) to generate a singular digital data stream 633. Other portions of the audio module are described in more detail elsewhere herein. / Right timing mechanism is configured to make two stereo channels (four A data line is shared with the audio input line. The 90 degree phase shift data is used to multiplex the outputs 602, 603 and 604, 005 of the in-phase ADCs 618, 620 and 619, 621. The higher order channels ( Channels 3 and 4) are 9 degrees out of phase with the lower channel (channels 丨 and 2). This allows two channel pairs (channel 1 left and right and channel 3 left and right) to share a single data line. 106124.doc •25- 1335154 Digital audio data is input to the DSP 600. The odd-numbered channels are on the same sequence line, and the even-numbered channels are on the same sequence line. The clock and pulse phase phasing circuit 628 provides input data line selection for the multiplexers 606, 608. Continuing to refer to Figure 7 'DSP 600 and multiplexers 606, 608 - may be provided in encoder 626 within transmitter 500. The encoder 626 receives four digitized audio inputs 602, 603, 604, 605 from the audio modules 622, 623, 624, 625 and uses the line driver 63 1 to transmit the digitized sequence data stream 633 to the IR transmitter module 634. For transmission to the headset 80. The encoder 626 also includes a clock and pulse phase phasing circuit 628, a boot/private memory 630, and a power source 632. The DSP 600 acts as a central control for the encoder 626 circuit' which includes control of all inputs and outputs to the audio transmission device 5'. A clocking divider provided in timing circuit 628 is enabled by DSP 600 to provide signals for driving the clock for any audio module (e.g., ADC) and audio data to the DSP. The DSP 600 combines the audio data 6 10, 6 12 from two sequence sources (multiplexers 6〇6, 6〇8) and formats the audio data into a single sequence data stream 633 of the data packet, which is provided to the line. The driver 63 1 is sent to the IR transmitter 634. In one embodiment, line driver 63 1 can be a differential line driver having an RS485 transceiver, and an inverter can be used to invert and buffer data from DSP 600. The DSP 600 uses the base 10.24 MHz clock of the timing circuit 628 multiplied by the internal phase locked loop (PLL) of the DSP. In one embodiment, the DSP clock speed is 8X MHz, but this speed can be reduced to reduce the overall power consumption consumed by the audio transmission device 5. I06124.doc -26-Continue to refer to Figure 7 'Start memory 630 during shutdown (including software that controls DSP) DSP 600 memory memory ^ 8 bit sequence electronic erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM) Can be used as boot memory 630. Once the DSP is powered up, it can be programmed into its startup program to search for external 5 memory circuits for loading and execution. The boot memory 63 is connected to the multi-channel buffer sequence 埠6l5 (McBSP1) of the DSP 600. In an alternate embodiment, the DSP software can be provided in DSP read only memory (ROM). Referring now to Figure 8, clock and pulse phase phasing circuit 628 produces all of the clocks required by encoder 626 and audio modules 622, 623, 624, 625. DSP, audio data transmission, and audio digitization require four separate clocks. These clocks are the main clock 660, the sequence clock 66 1 , the left/right clock 662, and the multiplexer clock 663. The multiplexer 6〇6, 608, as previously described with reference to Figure 6, also requires clock positioning to multiplex the digitized audio input streams 〇2, 603, 604, 605. The main day clock 660 is used to drive the main synchronization clock signal for the audio digitization module and dsp. The primary clock signal 660 is generated from a stand-alone crystal oscillator circuit 660 and has a buffered output 661. The main clock frequency is 1 0.24 MHz' which allows the autonomous clock to get the sequence clock and the left/right clock. Each individual bit of the digitized audio input streams 602, 603, 604, 605 from the audio modules 622, 623, 624, 625 is clocked into the DSP 600 using a sequence clock. A quarter-clock divider (667ne f〇unh clock divider) 667 is used to generate a timing signal having a frequency of 2.56 MHz, thereby obtaining a sequence clock signal 661 from the autonomous clock. The left and right data blocks I06124.doc • 27-1335154 generated by the left/right clock pair from the multiplexer 6〇6, 608 for input to the digital audio streams 61〇, 612 of the DSP 600 are used. Ten percent and generate DSP frame synchronization. The clock divider 667 is used to generate a signal that is 256 times slower than the primary clock, thereby obtaining a left/right clock signal 662 from the ± clock. The clock phasing circuit 668 separates the left/right clock into two phases by providing a 9-degree phase shift for one of the left/right clocks. This allows two of the four tone groups 622, 623, 624, 625 to produce a 9-degree phase shift output. The 90 degree phase shift data on the line is used to multiplex the output of the in-phase left/right clock audio module output. Each left/right clock phase acts as an independent frame synchronization for the digitized audio input streams 6〇2, 6〇3, 604, 605 from the audio module” and 622 623, 624, 625. The multiplexer clock 663 triggers the selected input data line to combine the digital audio packets from the digitized audio input streams 602, 603, 6〇4, 0〇5 of the audio modules 622, 623, 624, 625. The multiplexer clock signal 663 is also generated by the clock divider 667. The Dsp clock signal is used to drive the DSP 600, and the main clock signal 660 is converted to a low level as required by the DSp by the buffer/voltage converter 669. A voltage (eg, from 3 3 ^^ to 18 V) is generated by changing the base crystal oscillator frequency (ie, the 9.216 MHz base clock for the 40 KHz left/right clock can be changed to 44.1 KHz left/right clock. 2896 MHz base clock), other timing mechanisms can be used. Power supply 632 produces all of the voltages required by encoder 626. In one embodiment, encoder power supply 632 is acceptable. +10 VDC to +18 VDC input voltage range. Four independent voltages can be used on the transmitter backplane; Input voltage (typically +12 VDC), +5 VDC, +3.3 VDC, and +1.8 VDC. Transient protection can be used to prevent any thirst or any transients on the input power line. A voltage supervisor can also be used to maintain the stability of the DSP 600. An unregulated input voltage is used as the source voltage for +5 VDC. The regulated +5 DVC is used to power the IR transmitter module 634. Groups 622, 623, 624, and 625 use +5 VDC for input audio protection and input audio level bias. IR transmitter 634 uses +5 VDC for bias control and IR drive circuit 65 0. Adjusted +3.3 VDC The logic is supplied to the DSP 600 and encoder 626 and is also provided to the audio module for its ADC. The +3.3 VDC self-regulated +5 VDC supply voltage is generated and monitored by the voltage supervisor. Reduced to less than 10% of the +3.3 VDC supply, the voltage supervisor keeps the DSP 600 in reset until the voltage has increased above +3.0 VDC and has elapsed, such as 200 ms. Adjusted +1.8 VDC Powering the DSP core of encoder 626 and self-adjusting + 3.3 VDC power supply voltage generation. Referring now to Figure 9, in one embodiment, audio modules 622, 623, 624 '625) 1 and other digital 4-tone Ifl input L 602, 603, 604, 605 can be provided to the DSP. 600. The audio module can be an external or internal plug-in module of the encoder 626 or can be incorporated into the encoder. In an embodiment providing four audio channels, four audio modules can be used with the transmitter backplane. Each audio module, such as audio module 622 shown in Figure 9, accepts a pair of stereo audio pairs (left and right) of inputs 63, 639. Power and main clock, sequence clock and left/right clock are all supplied by encoder 626. Signal conditioning and input protection circuitry can be used to prepare signals 63 8 and 639 prior to digitization and to protect the input circuitry from transients. The signals 638, 639 can be adjusted independently. The direct current (DC) bias circuit 640 sets the 068, 639, -29, 1335, 154, 639 to the mid-range of the five volt supply to allow the input signal to be symmetrical on the DC dust. In this way, any clipping that occurs will occur equally on each positive and negative peak. The input surge protection circuit 641 can be used to protect the input circuit from transients and overvoltage conditions. Two of the signal conditioning and input protection circuits 64〇 back-to-back diodes provide transient protection to shunt any south voltage to the power supply and to the ground. The line level input can be limited to two volts, or some other feasible value (peak to peak). A low pass chopper can be provided to act as a prefilter to increase the dead band attenuation of the D/A internal filter. In one embodiment, each analog input audio channel frequency is 20 to 18 KHz, and the low pass filter 642 has a corner frequency of 14 〇 κ Ηζ or more to minimize its effect on the bandpass of the audio input. Continuing to refer to Figure 9', ADC 643 is used to digitize the left and right analog inputs 63 = 9 digits. The ADC 643 outputs a single sequence digital data stream 602 containing left and right channels to the encoder 626. The timing of the ADC 643 is generated using a primary clock of 1 〇 24 MHz, and the data from the ADC is clocked using a 2.6 M sequence data clock. Use the 4 〇 KHz left/right clock to frame the data into different audio samples. Each left and right analog sample can be a 16-bit value. Referring now to Figure 1, the ir transmitter or module 634 converts the digital data stream 633 to an IR (infrared) transmission signal 16. ppM (Pulse Position Modulation) coding is used to increase transmitter power by using bit position values. The ir transmitter 634 packs the 3-wire receiving 650, which is used to receive the differential RS485 signal from the line driver 63 633 to convert it into a single-ended data stream. The data stream is then buffered and passed to IINF24.doc -30. 1335154 to an infrared bias and control circuit 650 that drives the (e) light-emitting diode (LED) of the emitter 652 and Control the amount of energy transferred. The IR transmitter 634 includes four infrared bias and control circuits 650 and four individual transmitters 652, each having a duty cycle of 25 〇/〇. When a zero bit is sensed in data stream 633, the bias control maintains the (etc.) IR emitter in a very low on state to allow direct dipoles when a positive pulse (one bit) is sensed The body drive immediately applies the full power to the IR emitter diode. The sense resistor is used to monitor the amount of current supplied to the diode so that when the emitter diode driver is pulsed, the bias The pressure control maintains a constant current flowing through the diode. The IR transmitter 652 converts the digital data stream 633 into pulses of infrared energy using any feasible number of IR emitter diodes (e.g., four per IR emitter). Due to the physical characteristics of the diode, the bandwidth of the electrical data pulse is primarily limited by the fundamental frequency of the square wave pulse applied to the IR emitter diode. In one embodiment, the IR energy can be focused at a center wavelength of 87 〇 nM. Encoder 626 supplies all of the power to IR transmitter module 634. +5 VDC is used for the driver and bias control circuit 65〇. In the embodiment, the encoder 626 supplies the PPM encoded digital data stream 633 to the ir transmitter 634 at a rate of 11.52 Mb/s. Referring now to Figure 11' for use? ^88?613, 615, and 01^8, 614, 616 to independently gather data of four stereo (eight mono) channels. When any of the McBSPs has received the complete 16-bit data block, each DMA transfers the data block to the two hold buffers 670, 671 (for DMA1 616) or 672 for a total of four hold buffers. , 673 (for DMA0 I06124.doc • 31 · 1335154 614). Each river (; 1 > 613, 615 uses its own 1)] ^ eight 614, 616 and buffer pairs 672 / 673, 670 / 671 to move and store the digital data. While filling a buffer, the DSP 600 processes the complementary buffer β each buffer (for a total of 1 16-bit samples) to store twenty-five left data samples from two different ADCs and twenty-five A sample of the right data. Each block received by the parent-MBBSP increments the memory address of each DMA. When each buffer is full, an interrupt is sent from each DMA to the DSP 600. The DSP 600 resets the DMA address and refills the other buffers with a new set of data. Repeat this process continuously. The DSP 600 produces two transport buffers that are all the size of the fully transmitted packet 86. In one embodiment, 45 ( (16-bit) blocks are used in each packet (as discussed more fully below). ^ When a packet 86 is first initialized, a static header/trailer value is inserted. In the packet. For the initial packet and subsequent packets, the user ID/special selection/channel state (USC) value of the control block 96' data offset, dynamic header value, and channel audio data are added to each packet. Preferably, the usc value calculated from the previously encapsulated audio data is used. The audio data is PPM encoded and placed in the data block packet. Once a predetermined number (e.g., twenty-five) of samples from each channel has been processed, the packet 86 is complete. When the DSP 600 completely fills one of the output buffers, it is enabled to transmit a DMA (DMA2). The DMA 2 then passes the information in the filled output buffer to the sequence 埠 (MeBSPO) of the transmission device 500. The MeBSPO in turn sends the sequence data 033 to the line driver 63 i for transmission to the IR transmitter. Once the output DMA and McBSP are activated, they continue to operate. At I06l24.doc -32· 1335154 1335154 ♦ 搴 While DSP 600 fills one of these buffers, dMA2 empties another buffer and sends it to McBSPO. Synchronize via input data. The DSP 600 processes the interrupts of the DMA 614, 616, monitors the special selection and channel status information as described elsewhere herein, constructs each individual signal (or transmission packet) 86, and combines and modulates the audio data and packet information. . The DMA interrupt is used to inform the DSP 6 that the input audio buffer is full. At this point, the DSP reconfigures each DMA to begin filling the alternate hold buffer and then begins processing the "full" hold buffer. No interrupt is used to output on the DMA. Once the output buffer is full, the output dma is started to begin filling another buffer. As described more fully elsewhere herein, special selection information can be used to indicate whether the audio transmission is being used in a configurable configuration and can be provided via a hardware switch or can be hard coded ((4)(3)(d))) . Special selections can include, but are not limited to, "and" surround processing. In one embodiment, a state in which four inflamed persons are used is not particularly selected. The four-digit unit will provide four special users who can misplace the stickers, go to the switch, or choose five or fifteen hard codes. The normal operation of the headset can be a reserved selection indicating W_h. When using the switch selection, the fifteen special selections - or the minimum of the multiples will be used for additional selections (meaning gp, if two switches are used, only four special selections η 4 are used. Right use four For the switch, there is no extra symbol, but it can be used for example.

面的’一y吏用硬體開關來觸發贈6〇〇之ΗΡΙ(主機蟑介 立凡位準。ΗΡΙ上的—(高)可指示使用H I06l24.doc •33· H PI上的烫7 並在特殊㈣㈣。DSP 6GG可讀取HPIi車 珠、擇值中設定適當位元。 H狀態資訊可用以指示哪個立體聲頻道(左及 頻道在作肖。數位音訊資料之振幅可判定立體聲 作用中b α非作用中。若在立體聲頻道上未偵測到 一? ’貝11可在傳出封包中將通道狀態標記為關 J右在立體聲頻道上感測到作用中音m,則可 封包中將頻道狀態標記為開(一)。 在一實施例中,為了判定立體聲頻道是否為作用中的, 累積用於每—組四個立體聲頻道資料樣本之絕對值“且入 並累積每-左頻道及每—右頻道之二十五個樣本(一封: 中之個別頻道資料樣本之數量)。^立體聲頻道樣本之總 和超過音訊臨限值,則可將頻道狀態標為㈣中的。若立 f聲頻道樣本之總數不超過音制限值,料將頻道狀態 標為非作用t的。可使用四個位元(一位元用於每—頻道) 來指示立體聲頻道狀態並較佳在每次產生封包時將其更 新。 參看圖12,用於將四個頻道編碼為個別訊號或傳輸封包 86之實施例被展示為將每—訊號86分割為標頭部分87及資 料部分88。標頭部分87含有供接收器7〇〇(以下於本文中具 體地描述)感測、同步化及驗證一有效傳輸封包%之啟動 的所有資訊。在-實施例中,該標頭部分包含未經觀編 碼之前導碼(Preamble)值、端子值及間隙值,且進一步包 含經P P Μ編碼之產品識別碼及資料偏移值。 I06l24.doc -34. 1335154 輸=::::收—感測標頭部分-並與傳 為從不…靜態值。較 零之感測間隙。&等位……含有七個前導 70接收器700用來辨識間隙週期 之開始。間隙90之第二邱八及人+ ^ 焱門尬 邛刀為3有交替之—及零位元之觸 ^。此等位元由接收器7〇〇用來在間隙週期内使時脈The face of the 'one y吏 with a hardware switch to trigger the gift of 6 〇〇 ΗΡΙ (host 蟑 立 立 立 立 ΗΡΙ ΗΡΙ ΗΡΙ ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( And in special (four) (four). DSP 6GG can read HPIi car beads, select the appropriate bit in the selection. H status information can be used to indicate which stereo channel (left and channel are in the middle. The amplitude of the digital audio data can determine the stereo effect b α is not active. If no one is detected on the stereo channel? 'Bei 11 can mark the channel status as off in the outgoing packet and the right to sense the mid-range m on the stereo channel. The channel status flag is on (1). In an embodiment, in order to determine whether the stereo channel is active, the absolute value for each of the four stereo channel data samples is accumulated "and the per-left channel is accumulated and accumulated. Twenty-five samples per channel (one: the number of individual channel data samples). ^ If the sum of stereo channel samples exceeds the audio threshold, the channel status can be marked as (4). The total number of sound channel samples is not Overtone limits, which are marked as non-active t. Four bits (one bit for each channel) can be used to indicate the stereo channel status and preferably update each time a packet is generated. Referring to Figure 12, an embodiment for encoding four channels as individual signals or transmission packets 86 is shown dividing each signal 86 into a header portion 87 and a data portion 88. The header portion 87 is provided for the receiver 7 〇 (described in detail herein below) sensing, synchronizing, and verifying all information about the initiation of a valid transmission packet %. In an embodiment, the header portion includes a pre-coded preamble value. , terminal value and gap value, and further include the PP Μ coded product identification code and data offset value. I06l24.doc -34. 1335154 Input =:::: Receive - Sensing header part - and pass as No... Static value. Zero-sensing sensing gap. & Equivalent... Contains seven leading 70 receivers 700 to identify the beginning of the gap period. The second 90th of the gap 90 and the person + ^ 焱 尬邛For 3 there are alternating - and zero bit touch ^. This bit 7〇〇 used by the receiver so that when the pulse in the gap period

恢復電路穩定。該間陴 /間隙之第二部分為含有三個零位元之同 乂間隙。此4位元由接收器雇用來標記每—傳輸封包% 之開始。 前導碼醜可由預定數量之相等值(例如AAAA十六進制) 組,’以進―步使得用傳輸器5⑼來使接收器700同步成為 可能。該前導碼由兩個獨立之16位元(雙字組)值Μ、且 成,且由接收器700用來識別每一封包%之開始。亦使用 前導碼1字組89來輔助使時脈恢復電路穩定。該前導碼未 經PPM編碼,且可為從不改變之靜態值。前導碼工字組 較佳係置放於封包86之開始處,且前導碼2字組91較佳跟 在間隙90之後。前導碼字組i及2包含交替之一及零 (AAAAh)。前導碼2字組91之第一 ”―"位元可用訊號通知 (signal)特定封包86之開始。 跟在前導碼2字組91之後的是預定程式碼或唯一識別碼 ID(PID)92,可選擇其來唯一地識別傳輸器5〇0至接收器 700。PID 92較佳經PPM編碼,且為不改變之靜態值。例 如,可使用此特徵來製備僅可用於汽車中或僅限於與特定 I06l24.doc 05- 型號(make)之汽車或與特定型號之傳輸器一起使用之耳 機。因此,對於用於博物館中之耳機,其中參觀者租赁耳 機,可將耳機中之接收器程式化為僅在一偵測到僅由安裝 於博物館中之傳輸器则所傳輸之唯—識別碼⑴時便開始 知作。此㈣靠止參觀者W耳機,因為耳機在博物館 :之任何地方完全不起作用。原始設備製造商(嶋)可進 7步使用此特徵來控制售後配件之品質。舉例而言,車輛 製造商或汽車音㈣統製造商可將傳輸器安裝於其設備 中,但控制由其設備傳輸至符合〇EM之特定需要之彼等附 件(耳機、揚聲器等)製造商的唯一 m之許可(__)/分 跟在PID 92之後的是資料偏移值(d〇)93,跟在資料偏移 值93之後的是偏移部分94’即標頭部分87之最終部分。偏 移值93指示偏移部分94及資料填充符部分97之長度(意 即,其中字組之數晉、,曰甘ία ) 且其可為在每一傳輸訊號或封包 86中恆定並相等之固 u义值,或或者可隨機地或根據預定機 制動態地改變。逐·^妹 / K號改k偏移部分之長度可幫助避免固The recovery circuit is stable. The second portion of the gap/gap is a homogenous gap containing three zeros. This 4-bit is employed by the receiver to mark the beginning of each transmission packet %. The preamble ugly can be grouped by a predetermined number of equal values (e.g., AAAA hexadecimal), so that the transmitter 5 (9) is used to synchronize the receiver 700. The preamble consists of two independent 16-bit (double word) values and is used by receiver 700 to identify the beginning of each packet %. The preamble 1 block 89 is also used to assist in stabilizing the clock recovery circuit. The preamble is not PPM encoded and can be a static value that never changes. The preamble I-group is preferably placed at the beginning of the packet 86, and the preamble 2-word group 91 preferably follows the gap 90. The preamble blocks i and 2 contain alternating ones and zeros (AAAAh). The first "-" bit of the preamble 2 block 91 can signal the beginning of the particular packet 86. Following the preamble 2 block 91 is the predetermined code or unique identification code (PID) 92. It may be selected to uniquely identify the transmitter 5〇0 to the receiver 700. The PID 92 is preferably PPM encoded and is a static value that does not change. For example, this feature can be used to prepare only for use in a car or limited to Headphones for use with specific I06l24.doc 05-model models (make) or with specific models of transmitters. Therefore, for headsets used in museums where visitors rent headphones, the receivers in the headphones can be stylized It is known only when it detects the unique identification code (1) transmitted only by the transmitter installed in the museum. This (4) depends on the visitor W headphones, because the headphones are in the museum: nowhere at all The original equipment manufacturer (嶋) can use this feature in 7 steps to control the quality of the aftermarket parts. For example, the vehicle manufacturer or the car audio (4) system manufacturer can install the transmitter in its equipment, but Control by it The only m permission (__)/points that are transmitted to the manufacturer of their accessories (headphones, speakers, etc.) that meet the specific needs of 〇EM are followed by the data offset value (d〇)93, followed by Following the data offset value 93 is the offset portion 94', the final portion of the header portion 87. The offset value 93 indicates the length of the offset portion 94 and the data filler portion 97 (i.e., where the number of blocks is, And may be a constant and equal value in each transmitted signal or packet 86, or may be dynamically changed randomly or according to a predetermined mechanism. The length of the moving part helps to avoid solidification

疋頻率傳輸及/或接& # # #I I 又為差亚減少叢發雜訊效應。偏移部疋Frequency transmission and/or connection &###I I is also used to reduce the noise of the cluster. Offset

分94及資料填充符邱八Q 口P刀97 —同較佳含有相同數量之字組 (例如3 0個)’且進而备社收— 進而允卉將貢料部分隨機置放於一特定封 包8 6内’而為所有封句 — 准持疋之整體長度。偏移部分94 用以將唯一 PID 92白咨极加、 自貝科#分88隔開,且可含有各種資 料。此資料可為未經使用 便用的’且因此包含待由接收器700 吾棄或忽略之所有隨機值或 值次所有零值。或者,偏移部分94 106l24.doc • 36 · 1335154 可含有用於誤差偵測及/或誤差校正之資料,諸如指示音 訊資料或含於資料部分88中之音訊資料之特性的值。曰 藉由交錯資料區塊95與控制區塊96而形成資料部分8。 在一貫她例中,對於總共8〇個經ppM編碼之字組,資料區 塊95由音訊資訊之左及右編碣16位元值(1字組)之4個頻道 之5個樣本組成。資料區塊95可由任何其它數量之字組組 成。此外,由傳輸器5〇〇傳輸之每一訊號%中之資料區塊 不必須含有相等數量之字組,而是可各含有隨機或根據預 籲 $機制逐訊號變化之數量之字組。單一封包86内之連續資 料區塊95亦可在長度上變化。此外,連續封包^在其資料 部分88中可含有不同數量之資料區塊95。在每一封包“之 標頭區塊87中(諸如在偏移部分叫中)可包含表示(例如)每 -資料區塊中所含資料區塊之數量及字組之數量的指示 符,以賦能傳輸器700適當處理每一封包%中所含之資 料。 控制區塊96跟在每―f料區塊95之後,且在__實施例中 包含前述之特殊選擇及頻道狀態資訊,以及預定程式碼或 唯一識別碼使用者ID。如本文中其它處所述,使用者⑴可 為用於誤差情測之值,諸如藉由比較標頭87中所含之使用 者ID值與在隨後控制區塊%中所遇到之每一相繼使用者⑴ 值。若貫穿-封包86之使用者⑴之值不相同,則可將該封 ,可作為錯誤封包而丟棄,且在已接收特定數量之連續錯 誤封i之後’可去能耳機之音訊輸出。使用者I。可進一步 在各種傳輪裝置5〇〇之間進行區分,以使得(例如)經程 106124.doc •37· 1335154 式化以與安裝於特定製造商之汽車中之傳輸裝置—起使用 的接收器將不可與任何其它製造商之汽車中或諸如博 物知或私人家庭之建築物中的傳輸裝置—起制(如本文 中其它處進一步具體插述)。頻道狀態資訊可用以控制接 收器700上之頻道選擇開關,以僅允許選擇作用"員道, 並藉由將接收HDSP斷電來避免處理每—封包86〇非作 :中頻道相關聯之資料字組而使功率消耗最小化(如於本 δ兑明書中其它處更全面地描述)。 位於資料部分88末端的是可包含資料填充符97及末端區 塊或端子區塊(TRM)98之標尾99。TRM 98較佳可㈣位元 (單字組)值,且可由接收器7〇〇用來允許用以重新組態 McBSP參數並製備一新封包86之少量時間。trm %亦可 用以輔助在GAP 90週期内使接收器7〇〇硬體時脈恢復穩 疋,且如其它處所述,其亦可含有用於誤差偵測及/或校 正之資料。TRM 98較佳未經ppM編碼,且為較佳包含交替 之一及零(AAAAh)之靜態值。 現參看圖13’接收器裝置或耳機單元7〇0具有兩個獨立 4刀’其用以使接收之全向性(〇mni_direCtiVjty)成為可能 並用以將接收器之電路更平均地分配於耳機8〇之整個外殼 上。邊接收器之主要部分為初級接收器7〇2。二級模組為 二級接收器704。初級接收器702及二級接收器704均含有 IR接收器前置放大器。在一實施例中,初級接收器702可 含有接收器電路之主體,且當初級接收器IR接收器歸因於 佩戴耳機80之收聽者之方位或位置而不在所傳輸IR訊號之 I06124.doc -38- 1335154 視線内時’二級接收器702可用作IR訊號丨6之補充前置放 大器。 參看圖14 ’初級接收器702含有接收器DSP 71〇、汛接收 器/AGC 714、資料時脈恢復電路716、D/A轉換器(DAC)及 音訊放大器電路722、使用者可選擇之開關及指示器控制 電路7 1 8、啟動/程式記憶體73〇 ,及電源及電壓監管電路 740。DSP 710充當對於接收器7〇〇電路之中央控制,並控 制接收器之所有輸入及輸出。DSP 7 10接收來自IR接收器 ® 714之單序列流712中之IR資料封包。IR資料流712之開始 為傳入之資料封包產生訊框同步。時脈恢復電路716產生 用以取樣IR資料之IR資料時脈。DSp序列埠完成對於丨6位 το DAC之計時。自額外序列埠產生用於16位元d/a轉換器 之主時脈。 外部開關及指示器719可包含用以允許使用者存取諸如 選擇所要頻道及調節音訊音量之功能的開關。可提供lEE) 才曰示器’ DSP 7 1 0將驅動其以指示是否給接收器及所選頻 ® 道供電。控制電路718經介面連接(interface)外部開關及指 示器719與DSP 710,從而將來自開關之輸入提供至Dsp並 如DSP所指定來控制指示器。 可自時脈恢復電路71 6產生對於DSP 710之基礎計時。由 〇5?内部之?1^使至〇8?710之輸入時脈倍增。;〇8?時脈速 度可為8X MHz,且可降低,以使接收器7〇〇所消耗之整體 功率消耗最小化。DSP 71 0亦可經由電晶體及正反器來去 月匕一級接收姦704上之開關式電源(switching p〇wer I06l24.doc Ί〇 1335154 supply)。若軟體在規定量之時間中未偵測到有效訊號,則 如本文中其它處所具體描述’ DSP可去能該開關式電源並 自該接收器移除功率。 現參看圖15,使用IR接收器/AGC 714來轉化並放大接收 訊號16中所含之紅外線資料。ir接收器/AGC 7 14亦控制放 大,且為DSP 710及資料時脈恢復電路716產生數位資料流 712。IR接收器之可用距離視諸如傳輸器500功率及環境照 明條件之變數而定。在一實施例中,IR接收器/AGC 7 14之 整體增益可為約70 dB。 繼續參看圖15,IR接收器/AGC電路714含有前置放大器 770、最終放大器77 1、資料矯方級(或資料分割器)772,及 AGC(自動增益控制)電路773。IR前置放大器770將光學訊 號16轉化為電訊號,並提供第一級放大。ir前置放大器包 含二個獨立放大器。第一放大器包含四個IR光偵測器二極 體及一轉阻放大器(transimpedance amplifier)。在一實施 例中,組合寬視角光二極體可產生優於水平軸接收之12〇 度及垂直軸接收之180度的角度。可將日光過濾器倂入光 偵測器二極體中,其與電感性轉阻放大器反饋一同使環境 照明之DC偏壓效應最小化。當傳輸以訊號16時,在光偵 測器一極體中產生與IR訊號之強度成比例之電流脈衝。所 接收IR訊號之強度視離所傳輸IR源之距離而定。 將來自光二極體之電流脈衝直接應用於轉阻放大器。轉 阻放大器感測來自光偵測器二極體之電流脈衝之上升緣及 下降緣,並將每一脈衝轉換為電壓"循環第二放大器為 106l24.doc -40- 1335154 基本電壓放大器。AGC電路773控制第二級之輸出。第三 放大器亦為基本電壓放大器。給前置放大器770之第三級 之輸出端饋送最終放大級771及AGC 773之輸入。 最終放大級771用以進一步增加所接收IR訊號16之增 益,且亦充當用於左耳機(Headphone - Left)及右耳機前置 放大器75 0、770之組合器。最終放大器771包含兩個基本 電壓放大器。兩級放大之每一者增加所接收IR訊號之增 益。如下文中所述,AGC 773之第二級亦控制至最終放大 器之輸入訊號。將最終放大級之輸出饋送至AGC 773及資 料矯方級772。 AGC 773控制放大之IR訊號位準。AGC電路可包含一放 大器及三個獨立控制電晶體。三個獨立控制電晶體包括兩 個階層之AGC控制。第一階層之AGC控制使用兩個AGC控 制電晶體(對每一級使用一個),且執行於左耳機及右耳機 前置放大級75 0、770中之第一電壓放大器之後。第二階層 之AGC控制發生於兩個前置放大器750、770輸出級與至最 終放大級771之輸入端之接合處。為了產生AGC DC偏壓電 壓,矯正並過濾來自最終放大級輸出之IR訊號之正峰值。 運算放大器放大該DC訊號。放大之DC電壓之值視所接收 訊號強度而定(意即與離傳輸裝置500之IR發射器652之距 離成比例)。AGC電晶體電阻受DC偏壓控制,且視所接收 訊號強度而定。當訊號強度增加時,AGC電晶體上之偏壓 增加,且該訊號進一步被衰減。AGC 773因此為資料矯方 級772產生穩定之類比訊號。 I06124.doc 41 1335154 資料緯方級772自類比IR訊號產生數位化雙層方波(bilevel _ square wave)(意即 ,包含 一及零 ) 。 自最終 放大級 771之輸出端接收來自資料續方級之輸入。資料續方級比 較最終放大器77 1輸出電壓"循環"與一正及負臨限值位 準。當最終放大器輸出之正峰值超過正臨限值位準時,產 生高脈衝(一位元)。當負峰值超過負臨限值位準時,產生 低脈衝(零位元)。解決滯後現象,以防止雜訊不規律地改 是輸出位準。將資料矯方級772之輸出發送至時脈恢復電 路716,並將其作為IRf料輸出72〇發送至DSp71〇。 使用資料時脈恢復電路716來再生由傳輸器5〇〇使用之資 料時脈。在接收器700之一實施例中,資料時脈恢復電路 含有一邊緣偵測器及一 PLL(鎖相迴路)。資料時脈恢復電 路716利用該PLL來產生資料時脈並使其與傳入之汛資料 72〇同步。使用邊緣偵測器來產生具有每一上升位元邊緣 或下降位元邊緣之脈衝,以便為PLL產生用於額外資料樣 本之雙脈衝。當感制上升脈衝邊緣或下降脈衝邊緣時, 自邊緣偵測器輸出一短脈衝。將來自邊緣偵測器之輸出饋 送至PLL。 使用PLL來產生同步時脈,⑽71〇使用該同步時脈來 带樣IR貝料ail號7 i 2。pLL中之—頻率及相位電荷⑤比較器 吃路比&邊緣偵測器訊號與來自該plL之vc◦(壓控振堡 器)時脈輸出。將該比較器之輸出發送至一低通濾波器。 忒低通濾波器亦倂入有脈衝儲存器。目為該資料經 PPM(脈衝位置調變)且未提供恆定輸人至m比較器,所 I06l24.doc •42- 1335154 以^要脈衝儲存器。低通濾波器產生由PLL之VC〇使用之 DC電壓。VCO產生與低通遽波器所產生之DC電壓成比例 之輸出頻率。當來自迴路濾波器之電壓升高時,vcc>頻率 亦升高,且反之亦然。當vco之時脈輸出與邊緣偵測器輸 出同步時,低通濾波器電壓及vc〇頻率穩定。vc〇頻率保 持鎖定於與邊緣偵測器同步之狀態中,直至相位或頻率差 產生於VCO頻率與邊緣偵測器訊號之間。vc〇之輸出用作 用於DSP 710之序列埠711之資料樣本時脈,且其亦用作 DSP之基礎時脈頻率。接收器Dsp 71〇使用經恢復之資料 時脈來與傳輸IIDSP _同步,以使得由傳輸器則編碼並 傳輸之資料由接收器·以相同速率接收並解碼。虹亦含 有一鎖定偵測器(l〇ck detect),其可用以在pLL被鎖定(與 傳入之資料同步)時用訊號通知Dsp 71〇。因此,在處理傳 入之資料封包理時’而不是僅在處理每―資料封包之標頭 理時,接收器500持續恢復傳入之資料時脈。 現參看圖16,接收器700之一替代實施例包含資料時脈 恢復電路716 ’其未利用pLL而是使用邊緣偵測器π、調 諧至音訊傳輸裝置谓主時脈之頻率之晶體振i器Μ,及 用以使資料時脈與傳入之IR資料7丨2同步之緩衝器777、 778。使用邊緣傾測器775來產生具有每一上升位元邊緣之 脈衝。當感測到上升緣時’使用四個反或閘之組合來產生 紐脈衝’邊緣偵測器將其輸出。此為晶體振盪器Μ提 供同步化邊緣。邊緣偵測器之第一臟閘將真反轉㈣e ⑽⑽叫提供給資料流。將來自第一 n〇r閉之輸出發送至 I06I24.doc •43· 1335154 DSP 71 0之一序列埠。第二n0R閘提供提供緩衝/延遲。將 來自第二NOR閘之輸出饋送至一rc時間常數(延遲)。第三 NOR閘自該RC時間常數(延遲)觸發。第四n〇r閘收集第一 及第三閘之輸出。此為晶體振盪器776提供一短同步脈 衝。 晶體振盪器776及緩衝級777、778提供用於取樣IR資料 712之雙層時脈。晶體振盪器利用與輸出傳輸裝置500資料 時脈頻率匹配之晶體頻率。使用具有反相器之平行晶體來 提供自由振盪式振盪器。自邊緣偵測器產生之脈衝提供與 接收資料流7 12之同步。使用兩個反相器/緩衝器777、778 來為aa體振盈器776提供隔離。將經緩衝之輸出發送至 DSP序列埠資料時脈輸入端及電壓轉換緩衝器。電壓轉換 緩衝器將用於DSP核心時脈輸入端之時脈峰值位準降低至 1.8伏特。 現參看圖17 ’ DAC及音訊放大器電路722自DSP 710所輸 出之數位化資料流72 1產生類比訊號724,且進一步放大並 緩衝至耳機揚聲器81、83之輸出。DAC及音訊放大器電路 722包含DAC 780,其可為1 6位元DAC,用於自OSP序列埠 傳輸器7 I 3(自DSP 71 0根據收聽者選擇經由開關7丨9所選擇 之頻道)接收序列數位音訊資料流7 2 1以便自數位序列資料 机72 I產生獨立之左及右類比訊號724。基本上以與音訊模 組622、623、624、625中之類比數位轉換過程相反之次序 轉換數位資料流72卜經由低通濾波器781(以移除DAC所 產生之任何高頻率)將DAC 78〇之輸出傳送至音訊放大器 106l24.doc -44 . 1335154Sub-94 and data padding Qiu Ba Q-port P-knife 97 - preferably containing the same number of characters (for example, 30) 'and then ready for collection - and then Yun Hui will randomly place the tribute part in a specific packet 8 6 'and for all the captive sentences — the overall length of the standard. The offset portion 94 is used to separate the unique PID 92, from Becco #88, and may contain various materials. This information can be used without any use and therefore contains all random values or values all zeros to be discarded or ignored by the receiver 700. Alternatively, the offset portion 94 106l24.doc • 36 · 1335154 may contain information for error detection and/or error correction, such as values indicative of the characteristics of the audio material or the audio material contained in the data portion 88.形成 The data portion 8 is formed by interleaving the data block 95 and the control block 96. In her usual example, for a total of 8 ppM-encoded blocks, the data block 95 consists of 5 samples of 4 channels of the 16-bit value (1 block) of the left and right audio information. Data block 95 can be composed of any other number of words. In addition, the data blocks in each signal % transmitted by the transmitter 5 do not have to contain an equal number of blocks, but may each contain a number of words that are random or vary according to the pre-call mechanism. The continuous data block 95 in a single package 86 can also vary in length. In addition, the continuous packet may contain a different number of data blocks 95 in its data portion 88. In the header block 87 of each packet "such as in an offset portion call" may include an indicator indicating, for example, the number of data blocks and the number of blocks contained in each data block, to The enabling transmitter 700 appropriately processes the data contained in each packet %. The control block 96 follows each of the blocks 95 and includes the aforementioned special selection and channel status information in the __ embodiment, and Pre-programmed code or unique identifier user ID. As described elsewhere herein, the user (1) may be a value for error detection, such as by comparing the user ID value contained in the header 87 with Controls the value of each successive user (1) encountered in the block %. If the value of the user (1) through the packet 86 is not the same, the packet can be discarded as an error packet and a specific number has been received. After the continuous error seal i, the audio output of the earphone can be removed. User I can further distinguish between various transfer devices 5〇〇, so that, for example, the process 106124.doc • 37· 1335154 In order to be installed in a car of a specific manufacturer The receiver used will not be compatible with any other manufacturer's car or transmission device in a building such as a museum or private home (as further elaborated elsewhere herein). It can be used to control the channel selection switch on the receiver 700 to allow only the selection of the "personal channel, and to avoid processing each packet to be associated with the data block associated with the channel by powering down the receiving HDSP. Minimize power consumption (as described more fully elsewhere in this specification). At the end of data section 88 is the end of the data pad 97 and the terminal block or terminal block (TRM) 98. 99. The TRM 98 preferably has a (four)-bit (single-word) value and can be used by the receiver 7 to allow a small amount of time to reconfigure the McBSP parameters and prepare a new packet 86. trm% can also be used to assist in During the GAP 90 cycle, the receiver 7 〇〇 hardware clock recovery is stable, and as described elsewhere, it may also contain information for error detection and/or correction. The TRM 98 is preferably not ppM encoded. And preferably contains alternating And the static value of zero (AAAAh). Referring now to Figure 13 'receiver device or headphone unit 7〇0 has two independent 4 knives' to make the omnidirectionality of reception (〇mni_direCtiVjty) possible and to use the receiver The circuit is more evenly distributed over the entire housing of the earphone 8. The main part of the side receiver is the primary receiver 7〇2. The secondary module is the secondary receiver 704. The primary receiver 702 and the secondary receiver 704 Each includes an IR receiver preamplifier. In an embodiment, the primary receiver 702 can contain the body of the receiver circuit and is not in the primary receiver IR receiver due to the orientation or position of the listener wearing the headset 80. I06124.doc -38- 1335154 of the transmitted IR signal The secondary receiver 702 can be used as a supplemental preamplifier for the IR signal 丨6. Referring to Figure 14 'primary receiver 702 includes receiver DSP 71 汛, 汛 receiver / AGC 714, data clock recovery circuit 716, D/A converter (DAC) and audio amplifier circuit 722, user selectable switches and Indicator control circuit 718, boot/program memory 73A, and power and voltage supervisor circuit 740. The DSP 710 acts as a central control for the receiver 7 〇〇 circuit and controls all inputs and outputs of the receiver. The DSP 7 10 receives the IR data packet from the single sequence stream 712 of the IR Receiver ® 714. The beginning of IR data stream 712 generates frame synchronization for incoming data packets. The clock recovery circuit 716 generates an IR data clock for sampling the IR data. The DSp sequence 埠 completes the timing for the 丨6-bit το DAC. The primary clock for the 16-bit d/a converter is generated from the extra sequence. The external switch and indicator 719 can include a switch to allow the user to access functions such as selecting a desired channel and adjusting the volume of the audio. The lEE) can be provided. DSP 7 1 0 will drive it to indicate whether to power the receiver and the selected channel. Control circuit 718 interfaces external switches and indicators 719 and DSP 710 to provide inputs from the switches to Dsp and to control the indicators as specified by the DSP. The base timing for the DSP 710 can be generated from the clock recovery circuit 71. By 〇5? Internal? 1^ multiplies the input clock to 〇8?710. The 〇8? clock speed can be 8X MHz and can be reduced to minimize the overall power consumption consumed by the receiver 7. The DSP 71 0 can also be used to receive the switching power supply (switching p〇wer I06l24.doc Ί〇 1335154 supply) on the 704 via the transistor and the flip-flop. If the software does not detect a valid signal for a specified amount of time, then the DSP can decouple the switched mode power supply and remove power from the receiver as specifically described elsewhere herein. Referring now to Figure 15, an IR receiver/AGC 714 is used to convert and amplify the infrared data contained in the received signal 16. The ir receiver/AGC 7 14 also controls the amplification and generates a digital data stream 712 for the DSP 710 and the data clock recovery circuit 716. The available distance of the IR receiver depends on variables such as the power of the transmitter 500 and the environmental illumination conditions. In one embodiment, the overall gain of the IR receiver / AGC 7 14 can be about 70 dB. With continued reference to Figure 15, the IR receiver/AGC circuit 714 includes a preamplifier 770, a final amplifier 77 1 , a data level (or data divider) 772, and an AGC (Automatic Gain Control) circuit 773. The IR preamplifier 770 converts the optical signal 16 into an electrical signal and provides a first stage amplification. The ir preamplifier contains two independent amplifiers. The first amplifier includes four IR photodetector diodes and a transimpedance amplifier. In one embodiment, combining a wide viewing angle photodiode produces an angle that is better than 12 degrees of horizontal axis reception and 180 degrees of vertical axis reception. The daylight filter can be incorporated into the photodetector diode, which, together with the inductive transimpedance amplifier feedback, minimizes the DC bias effect of the ambient illumination. When the signal 16 is transmitted, a current pulse proportional to the intensity of the IR signal is generated in the photodetector body. The strength of the received IR signal depends on the distance from the transmitted IR source. The current pulse from the photodiode is applied directly to the transimpedance amplifier. The transimpedance amplifier senses the rising and falling edges of the current pulse from the photodetector diode and converts each pulse into a voltage. The second amplifier of the loop is a 106l24.doc -40-1335154 basic voltage amplifier. The AGC circuit 773 controls the output of the second stage. The third amplifier is also the basic voltage amplifier. The output of the third stage of preamplifier 770 is fed with the inputs of final amplification stage 771 and AGC 773. The final amplification stage 771 is used to further increase the gain of the received IR signal 16, and also acts as a combiner for the left earphone (Headphone - Left) and right earphone preamplifiers 75 0, 770. The final amplifier 771 contains two basic voltage amplifiers. Each of the two levels of amplification increases the gain of the received IR signal. As described below, the second stage of AGC 773 also controls the input signal to the final amplifier. The output of the final amplification stage is fed to the AGC 773 and the data level 772. The AGC 773 controls the amplified IR signal level. The AGC circuit can include an amplifier and three independent control transistors. The three independent control transistors include two levels of AGC control. The first level of AGC control uses two AGC control transistors (one for each stage) and is executed after the first of the left and right headphone preamplifier stages 75 0, 770. The second level of AGC control occurs at the junction of the two preamplifiers 750, 770 output stages and the inputs to the final amplification stage 771. To generate the AGC DC bias voltage, the positive peak of the IR signal from the final amplifier stage output is corrected and filtered. The operational amplifier amplifies the DC signal. The value of the amplified DC voltage depends on the received signal strength (i.e., proportional to the distance from the IR emitter 652 of the transmission device 500). The AGC transistor resistance is controlled by the DC bias and depends on the received signal strength. As the signal strength increases, the bias voltage on the AGC transistor increases and the signal is further attenuated. The AGC 773 thus produces a stable analog signal for the data level 772. I06124.doc 41 1335154 The data weft level 772 produces a bilevel _ square wave from the analog IR signal (meaning, including one and zero). The input from the data continuation level is received from the output of the final amplification stage 771. The data continuation level compares the final amplifier 77 1 output voltage "cycle" with a positive and negative threshold level. A high pulse (one bit) is generated when the positive peak of the final amplifier output exceeds the positive threshold level. A low pulse (zero bit) is generated when the negative peak exceeds the negative threshold level. The hysteresis is solved to prevent the noise from being irregularly changed to the output level. The output of data level 772 is sent to clock recovery circuit 716 and sent as an IRf output 72 to DSp71. The data clock recovery circuit 716 is used to regenerate the data clock used by the transmitter 5. In one embodiment of the receiver 700, the data clock recovery circuit includes an edge detector and a PLL (phase locked loop). The data clock recovery circuit 716 uses the PLL to generate a data clock and synchronize it with the incoming data. An edge detector is used to generate a pulse with each rising bit edge or falling bit edge to generate a double pulse for the PLL for additional data samples. The self-edge detector outputs a short pulse when sensing the rising pulse edge or falling pulse edge. The output from the edge detector is fed to the PLL. The PLL is used to generate the sync clock, and (10) 71〇 uses the sync clock to sample the IR beet ail number 7 i 2 . In the pLL, the frequency and phase charge 5 comparator eats the & edge detector signal and the vc◦ (voltage controlled vibrating) clock output from the plL. The output of the comparator is sent to a low pass filter. The 忒 low-pass filter also incorporates a pulse memory. The data is PPM (pulse position modulation) and does not provide a constant input to the m comparator, I06l24.doc • 42-1335154 to the pulse storage. The low pass filter produces the DC voltage used by the VC of the PLL. The VCO produces an output frequency that is proportional to the DC voltage generated by the low pass chopper. When the voltage from the loop filter rises, the vcc> frequency also rises, and vice versa. When the vco clock output is synchronized with the edge detector output, the low pass filter voltage and vc〇 frequency are stable. The vc〇 frequency remains locked in sync with the edge detector until the phase or frequency difference is between the VCO frequency and the edge detector signal. The output of vc〇 is used as the data sample clock for the sequence 711 of the DSP 710, and it is also used as the base clock frequency of the DSP. The receiver Dsp 71 uses the recovered data clock to synchronize with the transmission IIDSP_ such that the data encoded and transmitted by the transmitter is received and decoded by the receiver at the same rate. Rainbow also includes a lock detector (l〇ck detect) that can be used to signal Dsp 71 when the pLL is locked (synchronized with the incoming data). Therefore, the receiver 500 continues to restore the incoming data clock while processing the incoming data packet, rather than just processing the header of each data packet. Referring now to Figure 16, an alternate embodiment of receiver 700 includes data clock recovery circuit 716 'which does not utilize pLL but uses edge detector π to tune to the frequency of the audio transmission device as the primary clock. Μ, and buffers 777, 778 for synchronizing the data clock with the incoming IR data 7丨2. Edge detector 775 is used to generate a pulse having the edge of each rising bit. When a rising edge is sensed, 'a combination of four inverses or gates is used to generate a pulse.' The edge detector outputs it. This provides a synchronized edge for the crystal oscillator. The first dirty gate of the edge detector will be reversed (4) e (10) (10) is called to the data stream. The output from the first n〇r is sent to the I06I24.doc •43· 1335154 DSP 71 0 sequence. The second n0R gate provides a buffer/delay. The output from the second NOR gate is fed to an rc time constant (delay). The third NOR gate is triggered from the RC time constant (delay). The fourth n〇r gate collects the outputs of the first and third gates. This provides a short sync pulse for crystal oscillator 776. Crystal oscillator 776 and buffer stages 777, 778 provide a dual layer clock for sampling IR data 712. The crystal oscillator utilizes a crystal frequency that matches the data clock frequency of the output transmission device 500. A free-oscillation oscillator is provided using a parallel crystal with an inverter. The pulses generated from the edge detector are synchronized with the received data stream 7 12 . Two inverter/buffers 777, 778 are used to provide isolation for the aa body vibrator 776. The buffered output is sent to the DSP sequence, the data clock input, and the voltage conversion buffer. The voltage conversion buffer reduces the clock peak level used at the DSP core clock input to 1.8 volts. Referring now to Figure 17, the DAC and audio amplifier circuit 722 produces analog signal 724 from the digitized data stream 72 1 output from the DSP 710 and is further amplified and buffered to the output of the headphone speakers 81, 83. The DAC and audio amplifier circuit 722 includes a DAC 780, which can be a 16-bit DAC for receiving from the OSP serial port transmitter 7 I 3 (from the DSP 71 0 according to the channel selected by the listener to select via switch 7丨9) The sequence digital audio stream 7 2 1 is generated to generate independent left and right analog signals 724 from the digital sequence data processor 72 I. The digital data stream 72 is substantially converted in the reverse order of the analog digital conversion process in the audio modules 622, 623, 624, 625 via the low pass filter 781 (to remove any high frequencies generated by the DAC). The output of 〇 is transmitted to the audio amplifier 106l24.doc -44 . 1335154

782。音訊放大器782放大音訊訊號,且在耳機8〇與DAC 780之間提供緩衝。將來自音訊放大器782之輸出耦接至耳 機揚聲器8 1、83中。 例如圖14中所示之使用者可選擇之開關718允許收聽者 調節耳機揚聲器81、83中之音訊音量並改變音訊頻道。可 使用LED(發光二極體)來指示所選頻道。可使用兩個手動 操作選擇器開關來調節音量。按一次增加音量按鈕會發送 低脈衝至DSP 710,此時DSP將數位音訊資料音量增加一 具有預定值之位準。按-次降低音量按紐會發送低脈衝至 DSP,且DSP將數位音訊資料音量降低—位準。亦可使用 其它開I组態。DSP可提供預選數量(諸如8個)之總音量位 準。所有按紐可使用RC(電阻器/電容器)時間常數以供開 關防跳(switch debouncing)。 收聽者可使用手動操作選擇器開關來選擇所要之音訊頻 道。按一次頻道選擇按鈕會發送低脈衝至Dsp 7ιθ〇°,且 DSP(經由DSP序列璋傳輸器713)增加指示音訊輸出之頻曾 資料。可選擇預定數量(例如四個或八個)之不同頻道。; 達到最高頻道時,DSP翻轉至最低頻道(例如,頻道 : 頻道-)。或者’若-頻道不可用,則可將⑽程式化為自 動跳過該不可用頻道至下-可用頻道,以使得收聽者不会 遇到任何”死”頻道,而是總是在作用中頻道(意即,目 流音訊之頻道)之間選擇。可使用複數個led(例如,= 可用頻道之數3:的數量,諸如四個)來指八戶、…; 等LED之一之照明亦可指示將功率供:::::道。該782. The audio amplifier 782 amplifies the audio signal and provides a buffer between the earphone 8A and the DAC 780. The output from the audio amplifier 782 is coupled to the earphone speakers 81, 83. For example, the user selectable switch 718 shown in Figure 14 allows the listener to adjust the audio volume in the headphone speakers 81, 83 and change the audio channel. An LED (Light Emitting Diode) can be used to indicate the selected channel. Two manual selector selector switches can be used to adjust the volume. Pressing the Volume Up button once will send a low pulse to the DSP 710, at which point the DSP will increase the volume of the digital audio data by a predetermined value. Pressing the Volume Down button will send a low pulse to the DSP, and the DSP will reduce the volume of the digital audio data to a level. Other open I configurations are also available. The DSP can provide a total volume level of pre-selected quantities (such as eight). All buttons can use the RC (resistor/capacitor) time constant for switch debouncing. The listener can use the manual selector switch to select the desired audio channel. Pressing the channel selection button once will send a low pulse to Dsp 7ιθ〇°, and the DSP (via DSP sequence 璋 transmitter 713) will increase the frequency data indicating the audio output. A predetermined number (for example four or eight) of different channels can be selected. When the highest channel is reached, the DSP flips to the lowest channel (for example, channel: channel -). Or 'If the channel is not available, then (10) can be programmed to automatically skip the unavailable channel to the next-available channel so that the listener does not encounter any "dead" channels, but always in the active channel (meaning, the channel of the streaming audio). A plurality of leds (eg, = number of available channels 3:, such as four) may be used to refer to eight households, ...; illumination of one of the LEDs may also indicate that power is supplied:::::. The

王4電路且DSP I06l24.doc -45 - 1335154Wang 4 circuit and DSP I06l24.doc -45 - 1335154

710正在運作。或者’液晶顯示器或其它類型之顯示器可 指不所選頻道、音量位準及任何其它資訊。此種資訊可編 碼於每一資料封包之標頭中,且可包含關於所選音訊流之 額外資料(例如,藝術家、歌曲名稱、專輯名稱、編碼速 率等)以及諸如正串流於其它可用頻道上之内容、可用(與 不可用或”死”頻道相對)之識別、環境變數(速度、溫度、 %間、日期)及訊息(例如廣告訊息)之任何其它類型資訊。 所顯示之資訊可包含文字及圖形,且可為靜態或動畫的。 再人參看圖14 ’在關閉期間,啟動記憶體73〇為dsp 71 0 儲存程式記憶體。連接至DSP 710之序列埠715之8位元月 列EEPRQM可用以儲存DSP程式。—對DSP加電,便可來 其組態成搜尋外部記憶體來擷取並載入其操作軟體。邊 者,程式可提供於DSP唯讀記憶體(R〇M)中。 繼續參看圖14,且亦參看圖18,初級接收器7〇2電路相 上之電源740自二級接收器7〇4中之開關式電源76〇接收 功率761。電源640自電源759(例如,aaa電池或任何其节 類型或大小之電池’或或者經由電源線(p。體⑽d)來自 車輛或建築物電源线之DC,或任何其它可行電源)接必 DC功率,且包含+ 1.8 v(或其它電壓,如電路所需)驾 源及相關電壓監管器。經調節之+ 18㈣用以給Dsp 71The 710 is working. Or 'liquid crystal display or other type of display may refer to unselected channels, volume levels, and any other information. Such information may be encoded in the header of each data packet and may contain additional information about the selected audio stream (eg, artist, song name, album name, encoding rate, etc.) and such as being streamed to other available channels. The content, the identification of the available (as opposed to the unavailable or "dead" channel), the environment variables (speed, temperature, %, date) and any other type of information (such as advertising messages). The displayed information can include text and graphics and can be static or animated. Referring again to Figure 14' during the shutdown period, the boot memory 73 is the dsp 71 0 storage program memory. The 8-bit EEPRQM of the sequence 埠715 connected to the DSP 710 can be used to store the DSP program. — Power up the DSP and configure it to search for external memory to retrieve and load its operating software. On the other hand, the program can be provided in the DSP read-only memory (R〇M). With continued reference to FIG. 14, and also to FIG. 18, power supply 740 on the phase of the primary receiver 7〇2 receives power 761 from the switched-mode power supply 76 of the secondary receiver 7〇4. The power source 640 is powered by a power source 759 (eg, aaa battery or any battery of its type or size) or via a power line (p. body (10)d) from a DC of a vehicle or building power line, or any other feasible power source) Power, and includes + 1.8 v (or other voltages, as required by the circuit) and the associated voltage regulator. Adjusted + 18 (four) for Dsp 71

之⑽核心供電’且自經調節之+33 vdc電源電壓產生〇 使用電壓監管器來監控+3.3 VDC。若位準降低W 電源之1 0%以下,則雷壓的答β γ je态可保持DSP處於重設出 態。若位準降低至+3·3 VDC電源之1〇%以下,則電壓監, 106l24.doc *46- 1335154 器可保持DSP處於重設狀態,直至在電壓已增加至+3.0 VDC以上之後已過去諸如200 ms之時段。 繼續參看圖18,二級接收器704將功率761供給至接收器 系統700,且當初級接收器IR接收器714不在傳輸IR訊號16 之直接視線内時,充當用於IR訊號701之補充前置放大 器。二級接收器704包含IR接收器前置放大器750、開關式 電源760 ’及開/關開關762。當視線對於初級接收器ir接 收器714不可用時,IR接收器前置放大器750放大IR類比訊 號1 6。二級接收器ir接收前置放大器之兩個級與初級接收 器702中相同,且將第二級之輸出提供至初級接收器702之 IR接收器及AGC電路714中的AGC 773之輸入端。 開關式電源7 6 0將電池7 5 9電壓轉換為由接收器7 〇 〇電路 使用之位準。大多數二級接收器及初級接收器電路以小於 200 mA之電流在3.3 VDC上操作。開關式電源自兩個aaa 電池759產生3.3 VDC。開關式電源760能夠利用電荷泵(無 電感器)或或者利用升壓式轉換器自電池759獲得低至0.9伏 特之功率。可使用低通濾波器來移除開關式電源76〇之高 頻率組份。 開/關開關762賦能並去能開關式電源76〇。開/關開關電 路762直接由電池759供電。至開/關開關電路762之輪入 718包含一手動操作開關及dSP 71〇。將一手動操作 SPST(單極單擲)開關連接至―正反器之時脈輸人端,其中 每次按SPST開關會觸發該正反器。使用Rc(電阻器/電容 器)時間常數來減少來自SPST開關之振盈(㈣㈣及瞬變 I06l24.doc •47· 1335154 現^。來自正反器之高輸出·賦能開關式電源760。來自正 反益之低輸出去能開關式電源76〇,且有效自接收器電 路::功率。DSP 710亦可控制正反器之作用。若軟體在 :疋里時間中未偵測到有效訊號,則DSp 71〇可驅動一電 :體,以便以類似於手動操作SpST開關之方式觸發該正反 再次參看圖14,在操作中,DSp 71〇啟動一内部^^八, 以將接收於序料(MeBsp)7 i i上之經ppM4編碼之資料移 動至兩個接收資料緩衝器之-。-旦已收集一資料封包之 所有25個樣本,便設定__旗標,以觸發資料處理。當設定 了接收緩衝器,,已填充"旗標時,資料處理開始。此包含對 所選頻道之資料進行ppM4解碼,將高及低位元組組合為 元子、’且基於收聽者選擇而減小音量,及將用於所有 25個樣本之經解碼之左及右數位化值置放至一輸出緩衝器 DacBuffer中。當輸出緩衝器已被填充時,設定一旗標,且 第一 DMA經由輸出緩衝器持續循環,以將當前資料移動 至序列埠(McBSP)傳輪器713 ’以供傳輸至DAC電路722。 序列埠接收器7 11用於捕獲IR資料。接收器時脈(CLKR) 及汛框同步(FSR)來自外部源。將該接收器組態為單相 位、I字組、8位元訊框、〇位元延遲且資料最高有效位元 (MSB)在先。忽略首先接收之脈衝之後所接收之訊框同步 脈衝。在接收器時脈之下降緣上取樣所接收資料。 使用序列淳傳輸器713來將資料721呈現給DAC電路 722,以供音訊輪出至耳機揚聲器81、83。如上所述,傳 I06l24.doc -48· 1335154 輸器時脈(CLKX)及訊框同步(FSX)持續產生於内部。將該 傳輸器組態為單相位、4字組、16位元訊框、0位元延遲且 資料MSB在先。在傳輸器時脈之上升緣上取樣傳輸資料。 序列埠711之取樣速率產生器與DAC電路722及序列埠傳 輸器713—起使用。取樣速率產生器使用DSP 710時脈之9 分之一(divide-by-9)來達成8.192 MHz之頻率。取樣速率產 生器用64個時脈循環之訊框週期及32個時脈循環之訊框寬 度來驅動傳輸訊框同步訊號。序列埠711之取樣速率產生 器係主時脈。取樣速率產生器使用DSP 710時脈之4分之 一。取樣速率產生器用16個時脈循環之訊框週期來驅動傳 輸訊框同步訊號。 大體上以類似於傳輸器500之DMA緩衝器的方式來組態 接收器700之DMA緩衝器。DMA優先及控制暫存器亦含有 用以判定經多工化之中斷選擇之兩位元INT〇SEL暫存器, 其應設定為10b以對於DMA 0及1賦能中斷。DMA 0用以將 使用序列埠711之接收器所接收的IR資料712傳輸至兩個緩 衝器之一。其來源是序列埠711接收暫存器Drrl〇。目標 在兩個已接收資料缓衝器RxBufferl與RxBuffer2之一之間 切換。將計數器設定為每一緩衝器之大小,其可為408個 字組。同步事件係用於32位元傳遞之雙字組模式中之 REVT0。設定傳遞模式控㈣於多訊框模式、在區塊傳遞 π成寺的中斷,並後遞增(p〇st_increment)該目標。DMA 2 用以將單頻道之數位音訊傳遞至DAC電路722。其來源係 DSP輸出緩衝器DaeBuffer。目標係序列埠713傳輸暫存器 106l24.doc •49· 1335154 DXR1 一〇。將計數器設定為DacBuffer之大小,其可為4個字 組。同步事件為XEVTO。設定傳遞模式控制用於自動緩衝 模式、產生於一半及全部緩衝器處之中斷,並後遞增該來 源。 使用序列埠711接收器ISR來檢查資料流712是否得以同 步。接收資料狀態機開始於停留模式中,其中檢查已接收 資料以判定何時達成同步。正常操作僅開始於同步之後。 如圖12中所示’序列埠711接收器ISR首先檢查資料流標頭 區塊90中之前導碼91 Pre。當偵測到此同步時,將序列埠 711之接收器設定為雙相位訊框:第一相位為每訊框128個 32位元字組且無訊框忽略,第二相位為每訊框73個32位元 字組且無訊框忽略。此組合產生402個16位元字組之均等 物。狀態機繼續檢查隨後接收之字組形成預定程式碼。當 偵測到此同步時,初始化DMA 〇,其計數器長度設定為接 收緩衝器(RxBuffer)之大小之一半,即408/2 = 204個字 組。接著將目標設定為當前接收緩衝器,RxBufferl或(10) Core Powered' and self-regulated +33 vdc supply voltage generation 〇 Use voltage regulator to monitor +3.3 VDC. If the level is lower than 10% of the W power supply, the voltage of the β γ je state of the lightning pressure can keep the DSP in reset. If the level is reduced to less than 1% of the +3·3 VDC power supply, the voltage monitor, 106l24.doc *46- 1335154 can keep the DSP in reset until the voltage has increased to +3.0 VDC or more. Such as the period of 200 ms. With continued reference to FIG. 18, the secondary receiver 704 supplies power 761 to the receiver system 700 and acts as a supplemental preamble for the IR signal 701 when the primary receiver IR receiver 714 is not within the direct line of sight of the transmit IR signal 16. Amplifier. The secondary receiver 704 includes an IR receiver preamplifier 750, a switched mode power supply 760', and an on/off switch 762. The IR receiver preamplifier 750 amplifies the IR analog signal 16 when the line of sight is not available to the primary receiver ir receiver 714. The two stages of the secondary receiver ir receive preamplifier are the same as in the primary receiver 702, and the output of the second stage is provided to the IR receiver of the primary receiver 702 and the input of the AGC 773 in the AGC circuit 714. The switched-mode power supply 76 0 converts the battery 7 5 9 voltage to the level used by the receiver 7 〇 〇 circuit. Most secondary receiver and primary receiver circuits operate at 3.3 VDC with less than 200 mA. The switched mode power supply produces 3.3 VDC from two aaa batteries 759. The switched mode power supply 760 is capable of obtaining power as low as 0.9 volts from the battery 759 using a charge pump (without an inductor) or with a boost converter. A low pass filter can be used to remove the high frequency components of the switched mode power supply 76. The on/off switch 762 energizes and goes to the switchable power supply 76 〇. The on/off switch circuit 762 is powered directly by the battery 759. The wheel 718 to the on/off switch circuit 762 includes a manually operated switch and dSP 71 〇. Connect a manually operated SPST (single pole single throw) switch to the clock input of the “reverse”, where the flipper is triggered each time the SPST switch is pressed. Use the Rc (resistor/capacitor) time constant to reduce the jitter from the SPST switch ((4) (4) and transient I06l24.doc • 47· 1335154. ^ High output and enable switching power supply 760 from the flip-flop. From positive The counter-low output is capable of switching the power supply 76〇, and is valid from the receiver circuit:: power. The DSP 710 can also control the function of the flip-flop. If the software does not detect a valid signal during the time, then The DSp 71 can drive an electrical body to trigger the positive and negative in a manner similar to manually operating the SpST switch. Referring again to Figure 14, in operation, the DSp 71 initiates an internal ^8 to receive the sequence ( The ppM4 encoded data on MeBsp)7 ii is moved to the two receiving data buffers. - Once all 25 samples of a data packet have been collected, the __flag is set to trigger data processing. Receive buffer, when the "flag is filled, data processing starts. This includes ppM4 decoding of the data of the selected channel, combining the high and low bytes into the element, and reducing the volume based on the listener selection. And will be used for all 25 The decoded left and right digitized values are placed in an output buffer DacBuffer. When the output buffer has been filled, a flag is set, and the first DMA continues to loop through the output buffer to present the current data. Move to sequence 埠 (McBSP) Navigator 713 ' for transmission to DAC circuit 722. Sequence 埠 Receiver 7 11 is used to capture IR data. Receiver clock (CLKR) and frame synchronization (FSR) are from external sources. The receiver is configured as a single phase, I block, 8-bit frame, 〇 bit delay and the most significant bit (MSB) of the data is prior. Ignore the frame sync pulse received after the first received pulse. The received data is sampled on the falling edge of the receiver clock. The sequence 淳 transmitter 713 is used to present the data 721 to the DAC circuit 722 for audio to be output to the headphone speakers 81, 83. As described above, pass I06l24. Doc -48· 1335154 The transmitter clock (CLKX) and frame sync (FSX) are continuously generated internally. The transmitter is configured as a single phase, 4-word, 16-bit frame, 0-bit delay and The data MSB is first. The sample is transmitted on the rising edge of the transmitter clock. The sample rate generator of sequence 711 is used in conjunction with DAC circuit 722 and sequence port transmitter 713. The sample rate generator uses one-fifth of the DSP 710 clock (divide-by-9) to achieve 8.192 MHz. The sampling rate generator drives the transmission frame synchronization signal with a frame period of 64 clock cycles and a frame width of 32 clock cycles. The sampling rate generator of the sequence 埠 711 is the main clock. The sampling rate generator Use one-fourth of the DSP 710 clock. The sample rate generator drives the frame sync signal with a frame period of 16 clock cycles. The DMA buffer of receiver 700 is generally configured in a manner similar to the DMA buffer of transmitter 500. The DMA Priority and Control Register also contains a two-element INT〇SEL register to determine the multiplexed interrupt selection, which should be set to 10b to enable interrupts for DMAs 0 and 1. DMA 0 is used to transfer IR data 712 received by the receiver using sequence 711 to one of the two buffers. The source is the sequence 埠 711 receives the register Drr〇. The target switches between one of the two received data buffers RxBufferl and RxBuffer2. The counter is set to the size of each buffer, which can be 408 words. The sync event is for REVT0 in the double-word mode of 32-bit pass. Set the transfer mode control (4) in the multi-frame mode, pass the π into the temple interrupt, and then increment (p〇st_increment) the target. DMA 2 is used to pass a single channel of digital audio to DAC circuit 722. The source is the DSP output buffer DaeBuffer. Target sequence 埠 713 transfer register 106l24.doc •49· 1335154 DXR1 〇. Set the counter to the size of the DacBuffer, which can be 4 words. The synchronization event is XEVTO. The set transfer mode control is used for the automatic buffer mode, interrupts generated at half and all buffers, and then incremented by the source. The sequence 埠 711 Receiver ISR is used to check if the data stream 712 is synchronized. The receiving data state machine begins in a dwell mode in which the received data is checked to determine when synchronization is reached. Normal operation only begins after synchronization. As shown in Fig. 12, the sequence 711 711 receiver ISR first checks the preamble 91 Pre in the stream header block 90. When the synchronization is detected, the receiver of the sequence 埠 711 is set to a dual phase frame: the first phase is 128 32-bit blocks per frame and no frame is ignored, and the second phase is frame 73. 32-bit blocks and no frames are ignored. This combination produces an equalization of 402 16-bit blocks. The state machine continues to check the subsequently received block to form the predetermined code. When this synchronization is detected, the DMA is initialized and its counter length is set to one-half the size of the receive buffer (RxBuffer), which is 408/2 = 204 words. Then set the target to the current receive buffer, RxBufferl or

RxBuffer2。賦能下一 DMA 0,並關閉序列埠7 11接收器 ISR。先於下一同步損失將狀態機置放於停留模式中。若 資料流不再同步,則將序列埠711接收器設定為單相位、4 字組、無訊框忽略之8位元訊框,且開啟序列埠7丨丨接收器 ISR。 若未偵測到預定程式碼,則可假設已發生接收誤差,且 初始化DSP 71〇内之一計數器以計算所接收封包之數量, 其中未偵測已編碼值。在計數預選數量之此等發生之後, 106124.doc •50· 1335154 DSP可減弱至耳機之音訊輸出。基於預選數量之此等發生 之偵測而靜音(muting)消除了當遇到重複之接收誤差時可 發生之嗡嗡聲及嘭嘭聲,及間歇之聲音中斷。可將Dsp程 式化為在遇到第一誤差之後或在已計數更大數量(例如, 10個、50個、1〇〇個等)誤差之後將音訊輸出靜音。一將至 耳機之音訊輸出靜音,DSP便等待下一封包,在其中偵測 程式碼,且接著再次提供至耳機之音訊輸出,或等待直至 已接收預定數量之無誤差資料封包,此時可假設導致先前 接收誤差之原因不再存在,且系統再次能夠清晰接收。若 在某一時間(例如60秒)内未接收到無誤差之封包,則DSp 可初始化自動關閉特徵並關閉接收器7〇〇,此時,收聽者 將必須啟動手動開關762來再次啟動該系統。此外,若歸 因於被關閉之音訊裝置34或歸因於雜訊(例如,干擾光接 收之亮光),預定量之時間過去且根本未處理任何標頭, 則可使用自動減低或自動關閉特徵。 當DMA 0完成其傳遞時,重新開始同步程序。關閉dma 〇 ’開啟序列埠711接收器’且觸發當前緩衝器指數,以指 示RxBufferl或RxBuffer2。接著設定一旗標,其指示dma 傳遞完成。DSP 710中之主迴路等待(在〇]^人〇 ISR中)設定 一旗標,其指示含有四個頻道之音訊之封包已接收並傳遞 至兩個接收緩衝器之…當設定了此旗標時,由Dsp 71〇 進行之輸出處理開始。輸出處理由基於緩衝器指數判定當 前緩衝器,接著使麟選頻道:㈣來㈣並解碼經舰4 編碼之左及右頻道資料組成。應用所選音量位準來衰減數 106124.doc -51 · 1335154 位訊號,且接著如先前參看圖14所述,將用於左及右耳機 之最終數位訊號置放於當前傳出之資料區塊中,以供傳輸 至用於轉換及放大之DAC電路。 在不脫離本發明之精神或範疇的情況下,可對本文中所 揭示之實施例做出許多修改及增加,其包含硬體及軟體修 改、額外特徵及功能,及不同於音訊串流或除音訊串流之 外之用途。 現參看圖19,諸如汽車 '巴士、火車(train car)、軍 艦、飛機或其它適當車輛之車輛8〇0可包含工廠安裝或售 後安裝之音訊裝置34,其可為包括一無線調諧器、— 播放器或一卡式錄音帶播放器及一放大器之典型内置音響 主機(丨n-dash head unit)。展示音訊裝置34係由車輛8〇〇之 電源系統802(例如電池、交流發電機等)供電。 通汛系統80 1可添加至車輛8〇〇,且包含插件單元82〇, 其含有傳輸器子系統12及I.R傳輸器驅動器22,且連接至音 訊裝置34以自其接收至少一頻道之立體聲音訊資料。其它 資料源,例如視訊裝置(諸如DVd播放器832)及音訊裝置 (諸如MP3播放器834),可連接至插件單元82〇。如先前所 述’該插件單元可接受數位及類比資料,且較佳由音訊裝 置34供電。通訊系統82〇進一步包含含有汛發光二極體 (LED)20之傳輸器8〇6,及用以連接插件單元82〇與傳輸器 806之配線裝置(〜卜丨叫harness)8〇4。或者,包含ir傳輸器 或LED 20及IR傳輸器驅動器22之整個IR傳輸器部分18可包 含於傳輸器806内。 I06l24.doc -52- 1335154 如先則所述,傳輸器子系統12接收多個頻道之音訊資料 產生|數位化音訊訊號。將該數位化音訊訊號提供至 IR傳輸器驅動器22’其產生適當電流來操作led2〇以發射 IR讯號16。若1R傳輸器驅動器22係包含於插件單元82〇 内,則配線裝置804將此電流載運至傳輸器806中之LED 或者若IR傳輸器驅動器22係包含於傳輸器内, 則配線裝置m將傳輸器子系統12所產生之數位化音訊訊 破載運至IR傳輸器驅動器。 〇。包含三個離散元件(插件單元82〇、酉己線裝置8〇4及傳輸 益806)之通訊系統8G1之此分段設計提供:將系統謝作為 工廠選擇或在車輛離開工廠之後作為售後附加品安裝於車 輛_中的簡易性。插件單元㈣可安裝於車輛之儀錶板 中,且可利用至内置音響主機或音訊裝置34之單一連接, 且視情況可利用至每一額外音訊源之連接。或者,音訊裝 置34可能夠將多個同步頻道之音訊提供至插件單元㈣, 其中需要組態至音訊裝置34之單一連接。 傳輸器806必須安裝於一將提供足夠寬之至車輛後方之 直接視線的位置處。傳輸器8〇6可安裝於車輛8〇〇之圓頂燈 外殼内。藉由將IR傳輸器驅動器22倂入插件單元82〇内, 進而使傳輸器806變得才目對小(因為其僅含有咖2〇卜可 進一步幫助此種安裝。配線裝置8〇4亦相對小,因為立僅 需要含有少量電線來載運一將由IR傳輸器驅動器U放^或 將直接操作LED 20之數位化訊號。在任一情況下,由配線 裝置804載運之電流之電壓及功率非常低,且配線裝置較 I06l24.doc -53- 1335154 佳形成有進一步簡化車輛800中之安裝的小橫截面,因為 其可易於沿曲折路徑而行且需要有限空間。 繼續參看圖19,系統801進一步包含經配備以接收訊號 16之裝置,諸如耳機單元14及揚聲器842。耳機單元及/或 揚聲器均可配備有用以自傳輸器806接收IR訊號16之IR接 收器70。在本文中其它處更具體地描述耳機單元。揚聲器 842配備有類似電路,其包含IR接收訊號處理器72、具有 時脈之解碼器74、解多工器及控制器、用於數位類比轉換 之DSP 76 ’以及用以放大所選頻道之一或多個放大器。 在一替代性實施例中’揚聲器842可不包含一頻道開關 選擇器78,而是可經程式化成總是播放預選頻道,例如在 該耳機單元處選擇之頻道。此外,歸因於較高之功率需 要,揚聲器842較佳係由車輛電源系統8〇2(圖19中未圖示) 經由電纜供電。或者,可將揚聲器842程式化成自動切入 並播放用於司機與乘客之間通訊之優先頻道,或諸如如先 削所述之嬰兒監控器或行動電話頻道之緊急頻道。 現參看圖20,車輛8〇〇可具有包含音訊裝置“之通訊系 -先 展示為由電源糸統802(例如,電池、交流發電 機等)供電。音訊裝置34可經由電線8〇4固線式連接 (hardwire)至包含一 IR傳輸器(例如發光二極體(led))及一 IR接收器(光接收器)之傳輸器/接收器_。如先前所述, 音訊裝置34可提供複數個頻道之音訊資料。在其它實施例 中,音訊裝置34可提供其它類型之資料,包含視訊資料、 行動電話聲音資料及文字資肖。因此,諸如DVD播放器 I06l24.doc •54- 1335154 803之視訊裝置可連接至音訊裝置34,如先前所述,其又 可對來自DVD播放器之視訊訊號編喝,且將其提供至丨尺傳 輸器/接收器806 ’以供經由IR訊號丨6朝車輛8〇〇後方傳 輸。車輛800亦可包含可連接至音訊裝置34之行動電話或 其匕無線通訊裝置805,其可再次對來自電話之聲音流編 碼以供IR傳輸。如下文中所述,可提供設備以供乘客進行 雙向通訊以經由音訊裝置34及其它IR裝置在電話上交談。 系統801可進一步包含IR中繼器81〇,類似於傳輸器/接 收器806,其包含一 IR傳輸器及一 IR接收器。中繼器8ι〇接 收IR訊號16並將其再傳輸,從而增加系統8〇1之有效傳輸 區域。可設計中繼器81〇以轉遞來自車輛8〇〇前方、來自後 方或來自任何其它或所有方向之訊號16。因此,視應用而 定,中繼器810可倂入面對多個接收方向之多個接收器及 面對多個傳輸方向之多個傳輸器。中繼器81〇需要電源(未 展示),其可包含電池、至車輛電源之連接、安裝於車辅 _之頂部上之太陽能電池板,或任何其它可行或便利之 電源。 系統謝視情況可包含通訊子系統82〇,該子系統82〇包 含經由連接至車輛_之電源的電線如(諸如經由教車燈 ^ke Ught))供電之崎㈣組8〜傳輸^接收器咖經 由電線827連接至模組822,以_^接#71?. X便接收汛訊號16並轉遞至該 权,·且,且以便自模組22接 —π u 文訊唬以經由戊朝車輛800之 匕區域傳輸。模組822包含類似 ς 、曰訊裝置34之電路(包含 DSP) ’以接党資料輸並 先則對於傳輪器826之IR傳輪 I06124.doc •55. 1335154 所述般將資料編碼。輸入資料可為數位或類比的,且因此 杈組822可包含一或多個ADC,以接受類比資料並如本文 中所揭示般將其數位化以供編碼。車輛8〇〇之製造商可預 先t裝子系統820,從而允許車輛之隨後購買者如下文中 所述般基於所需要或所要求安裝訂製之IR裝置,而無需車 輛内費力、複雜之額外配線安裝。 模組822可接收多種資料,其包含來自攝影機83〇之類比 或數位視訊資料,以供經由傳輸器/接收器826、8〇6(且視 情況可經由8 1 0)傳送至音訊裝置34。音訊裝置可包含或連 接至用於顯示自攝影機83〇接收之音訊資料之視訊顯示器 831。可將攝影機83〇安裝於車輛之後部,以提供位於車輛 8〇〇之後的汽車之即時顯示,且基本上充當用以警告司機 另一車輛或其它障礙物是否過於接近車輛8〇〇之後視鏡及/ 或接近度感測器(pr0ximity sens〇r)。模組822亦可自諸如麥 克風832之音訊裝置接受音訊輸入。可使用麥克風832作為 音訊監控器,例如,如先前所述之嬰兒監控器,或用於在 車輛800之後部中行進之病人的醫用監控器。如先前所 述,佩戴耳機80者亦可使用麥克風835來存取連接至音訊 裝置34之行動電話裝置(或民用波段無線電(CB以⑴幻,或 任何其它類型之無線通訊裝置),以經由行動電話或其它 通訊裝置接收並進行交談。因此,麥克風832在實體上可 與耳機80分離,或或者可倂入耳機80中。耳機80或麥克風 835可倂入某些控制,以存取行動電話或其它通訊裝置之 特徵,諸如掛斷、撥號、音量控制及通訊頻道選擇。 106124.doc •56- 模組8 2 2可自的批gg。η 風工β 33接受諸如患者監控資料(例如心 跳、/皿度專)之盆它杳祉k ,、貝枓輸入,該監控器833在實體上可應 用於在車輛8〇〇中行進、+ 可兩要怪定監控的人上,。監# 器833可為任何其它 皿技 ^ 〇〇 之i控器,且因此可為用於待使 今°。之酿度監控器,以向車輛800之司機報告容器之 'rf ’該容器諸如(例如)食品運輸服務公司正運輸之食品 谷器。 系統801可進—步包含安裝於(例如)乘客座心㈣^ 供坐在後座十之乘客(為了清晰起見,圖2〇中未展示乘客) 觀看的視訊顯示裝置838。_示器謂包含用於接收含有 (例如)來自DVD播放器8〇3或來自攝影機㈣之視訊資料之 IR訊號16的IR接收器839。 視it況,遊戲控制裝置836亦可連接至模組,以供與 連接至音訊裝置34之視訊遊戲器837通訊。在此實施例 中,乘客可佩戴耳機80來收聽由視訊遊戲器837執行以產 生供音讯裝置34傳輸之音訊及視訊訊號之遊戲軟體的聲執 (oundtrack)。可在顯示裝置838上向乘客顯示視訊訊號, 且乘客可經由用遊戲控制裝置(例如操縱桿、觸摸墊、滑 鼠等)836輸入來與在遊戲器上執行之遊戲軟體互動。 模組822可進一步將音訊資料輸出至音訊揚聲器842,從 而消除為了揚聲器而使電線自車輛8 〇〇之前方延伸至後方 之需要。揚聲器842可由車輛電源供電,在此情況下,其 可包含一用以放大自模組822接收之音訊訊號之放大器。 或者,模組822可包含將所接收訊號16處理為類比音訊訊 IU6l24.doc -57- 1335154 號並在將該類比訊號提供至揚聲器842之前將其放大所需 要之所有電路(包含DAC)。經由揚聲器842播放之頻道可= 由音訊裝置34(意即,由車輛8〇〇之驅動器)或包含遊戲控制 裝置836之任何其它輸入裝置(意即,由車輛中之乘客)來選 .擇,且可在自音訊裝置傳輸以供模組822内之解碼的 母封包之標頭中指示如此選擇之頻道。 在前述編碼機制(諸如關於圖12所述之機制)之其它實施 例中’可將資料以各種其它組態配置於傳輸緩衝器中,以 •,咸少接收器之處理功率消耗。作為一實例,表示一頻道之 所有資料可相繼儲存於緩衝器中(且隨後被傳輸),接著是 下一頻道等等。若一頻道或若干頻道不可用,則可在每一 封包之標頭令識別該等頻道。以此方式,在正接收非作用 中頻道資料之時間期間,接收器Dsp可斷電。 當—或多個頻道為非作用中時,傳輸器可(例如)藉由以 較高速率取樣傳入之音訊資料以提供較高品質之數位流來 物己置給每一頻道之帶寬。或者,傳輸器可藉由增加誤 差偵測及/或校正特徵(諸如包含冗餘樣本或諸如裏德·薩洛 蒙值(Reed-Salomon value)之進階誤差校正資訊)來利用超 額能力。 為了使接收誤差最小化,亦可視接收器所經歷之誤差之 數里及頒型而疋來έ周節包含於每一封包中之音訊樣本之數 ®。此特徵將可需要一些來自接收器之關於所經歷誤差之 反饋,基於該反饋可將傳輸器DSP程式化為每封包包含較 少音訊樣本。 i06l24.doc -5S- 1335154 亦可使用其它誤差偵測機制。作為一實例 隨機改變程式碼, ^封匕地 插入資料區塊内之—位置 ^亦將其 同@石民枯 一干位置處。或者,可使用相 门,扁媽值。亦可逐封包隨機改變該(等)值之該(等)位置, 以移除固定頻率誤差之影經。可在# 4 該(等)仂菩 了在母一封包之標頭中規定 經程式化以讀取該值之DSP接著在資料區 塊内之該(等)規定位置處檢 (等)值不匹配桿頭中所損… 之該RxBuffer2. Enable the next DMA 0 and turn off the sequence 埠7 11 Receiver ISR. The state machine is placed in the dwell mode prior to the next synchronization loss. If the data stream is no longer synchronized, the sequence 埠 711 receiver is set to a single-phase, 4-word, octave frame that is ignored by the frame, and the sequence 埠7丨丨 receiver ISR is turned on. If the predetermined code is not detected, it can be assumed that a reception error has occurred, and a counter in the DSP 71 is initialized to calculate the number of received packets, wherein the encoded value is not detected. After counting the pre-selected number, the 106124.doc •50· 1335154 DSP can be attenuated to the audio output of the headset. Muting based on the detection of such pre-selected quantities eliminates clicks and pops that can occur when repeated reception errors are encountered, and intermittent sound interruptions. The Dsp can be programmed to mute the audio output after encountering the first error or after counting a larger number (e.g., 10, 50, 1 , etc.) of errors. As soon as the audio output to the headset is muted, the DSP waits for the next packet, detects the code therein, and then provides the audio output to the headset again, or waits until a predetermined number of error-free data packets have been received. The cause of the previous reception error no longer exists and the system can receive it again clearly. If no error-free packets are received within a certain time (eg, 60 seconds), the DSp may initialize the auto-shutdown feature and turn off the receiver 7〇〇, at which point the listener will have to activate the manual switch 762 to start the system again. . In addition, if due to the closed audio device 34 or due to noise (eg, light that interferes with light reception), a predetermined amount of time has elapsed and no headers have been processed at all, an auto-reduction or auto-shutdown feature can be used. . When DMA 0 completes its transfer, the synchronization process is restarted. Close dma 〇 'Open Sequence 埠 711 Receiver' and trigger the current buffer index to indicate RxBufferl or RxBuffer2. A flag is then set which indicates that the dma transfer is complete. The main loop in the DSP 710 waits (in the 〇 ^ 〇 ISR) to set a flag indicating that the packet containing the audio of the four channels has been received and passed to the two receive buffers... when the flag is set At the time, the output processing by Dsp 71〇 starts. The output processing consists of determining the current buffer based on the buffer index, and then lining the channel: (4) to (4) and decoding the left and right channel data encoded by the ship 4. Applying the selected volume level to attenuate the number 106124.doc -51 · 1335154 bit signals, and then placing the final digital signals for the left and right headphones in the currently outgoing data block as previously described with reference to FIG. Medium for transmission to the DAC circuit for conversion and amplification. Many modifications and additions may be made to the embodiments disclosed herein, including hardware and software modifications, additional features and functions, and different from audio streaming or removal, without departing from the spirit or scope of the invention. Use outside of audio streaming. Referring now to Figure 19, a vehicle 800 such as a car 'bus, train car, warship, aircraft or other suitable vehicle may include a factory installed or aftermarket installed audio device 34, which may include a wireless tuner, — A typical built-in audio unit (播放n-dash head unit) for a player or a cassette player and an amplifier. The display audio device 34 is powered by a power system 802 (e.g., battery, alternator, etc.) of the vehicle. The overnight system 80 1 can be added to the vehicle 8 〇〇 and includes a plug-in unit 82 含有 that includes a transmitter subsystem 12 and an IR transmitter driver 22 and is coupled to the audio device 34 to receive at least one channel of stereo audio therefrom data. Other sources of information, such as video devices (such as DVd player 832) and audio devices (such as MP3 player 834), can be coupled to plug-in unit 82A. The plug-in unit accepts digits and analog data as previously described and is preferably powered by the audio device 34. The communication system 82 further includes a transmitter 8〇6 including a neon light emitting diode (LED) 20, and a wiring device (~harness) 8〇4 for connecting the card unit 82 and the transmitter 806. Alternatively, the entire IR transmitter portion 18 including the ir transmitter or LED 20 and the IR transmitter driver 22 can be included in the transmitter 806. I06l24.doc -52- 1335154 As described above, the transmitter subsystem 12 receives audio data from a plurality of channels to generate | digitized audio signals. The digitized audio signal is provided to the IR transmitter driver 22' which generates the appropriate current to operate the LED2 to transmit the IR signal 16. If the 1R transmitter driver 22 is included in the card unit 82A, the wiring device 804 carries the current to the LEDs in the transmitter 806 or if the IR transmitter driver 22 is included in the transmitter, the wiring device m transmits The digitized audio signal generated by the subsystem 12 is broken and transported to the IR transmitter driver. Hey. This segmentation design of the communication system 8G1 comprising three discrete components (plug-in unit 82〇, 酉 line device 8〇4 and transmission benefit 806) provides: the system is selected as a factory option or as an aftermarket addition after the vehicle leaves the factory The simplicity of the product installed in the vehicle_. The plug-in unit (4) can be installed in the dashboard of the vehicle and can utilize a single connection to the built-in headphone or audio device 34, and optionally to each additional source of audio. Alternatively, the audio device 34 can provide audio for multiple synchronized channels to the plug-in unit (4) where a single connection to the audio device 34 is required. The transmitter 806 must be mounted at a location that will provide a direct line of sight that is wide enough to the rear of the vehicle. The transmitter 8〇6 can be mounted in the dome light housing of the vehicle 8〇〇. By inserting the IR transmitter driver 22 into the card unit 82, the transmitter 806 is made smaller (because it only contains coffee 2), which can further assist in such installation. The wiring device 8〇4 is also relatively Small, because the standup only needs to contain a small amount of wires to carry a digitized signal that will be placed by the IR transmitter driver U or will directly operate the LED 20. In either case, the voltage and power of the current carried by the wiring device 804 is very low, Moreover, the wiring device is preferably formed with a smaller cross section that further simplifies the installation in the vehicle 800 because it can easily travel along a tortuous path and requires a limited space. With continued reference to Fig. 19, the system 801 further includes A device is provided to receive signal 16, such as earphone unit 14 and speaker 842. The earphone unit and/or speaker can be provided with an IR receiver 70 that is used to receive IR signal 16 from transmitter 806. More specifically described elsewhere herein. Headphone unit. The speaker 842 is equipped with a similar circuit, which comprises an IR receiving signal processor 72, a decoder with a clock 74, a demultiplexer and a controller, for counting The analog conversion DSP 76' and to amplify one or more of the selected channels. In an alternative embodiment, the 'speaker 842 may not include a channel switch selector 78, but may be programmed to always play a preselected channel. For example, the channel selected at the headset unit. Furthermore, due to the higher power requirements, the speaker 842 is preferably powered by the vehicle power system 8〇2 (not shown in Figure 19) via a cable. The speaker 842 is programmed to automatically cut in and play a priority channel for communication between the driver and the passenger, or an emergency channel such as a baby monitor or mobile phone channel as described first. Referring now to Figure 20, the vehicle 8 can have The communication system including the audio device is first shown as being powered by a power supply 802 (eg, a battery, an alternator, etc.). The audio device 34 can be hardwired via an electrical wire 8〇4 to include an IR transmitter. (eg, a light-emitting diode (LED)) and an IR receiver (light receiver) transmitter/receiver_. As previously described, the audio device 34 can provide audio information for a plurality of channels. In other embodiments, the audio device 34 can provide other types of data, including video data, mobile phone sound data, and text. Therefore, a video device such as a DVD player I06l24.doc • 54-1335154 803 can be connected to the audio device. The device 34, as previously described, can in turn compose the video signal from the DVD player and provide it to the scale transmitter/receiver 806' for transmission to the rear of the vehicle via the IR signal 丨6. The vehicle 800 can also include a mobile phone connectable to the audio device 34 or its wireless communication device 805 that can again encode the sound stream from the phone for IR transmission. As described below, equipment may be provided for two-way communication by the passenger to talk over the telephone via the audio device 34 and other IR devices. System 801 can further include an IR repeater 81, similar to transmitter/receiver 806, which includes an IR transmitter and an IR receiver. The repeater 8 〇 receives the IR signal 16 and retransmits it, thereby increasing the effective transmission area of the system 8.1. The repeater 81 can be designed to transmit signals 16 from the front of the vehicle 8 from the rear or from any other or all directions. Thus, depending on the application, the repeater 810 can split into multiple receivers facing multiple receive directions and multiple transmitters facing multiple transmission directions. The repeater 81 requires a power source (not shown), which may include a battery, a connection to the vehicle's power source, a solar panel mounted on top of the vehicle, or any other suitable or convenient power source. The system thank-in case may include a communication subsystem 82A containing a power supply via a wire connected to the vehicle's power source (such as via a teach light) to the Sakizaki (4) group 8 to transmission ^ receiver The coffee is connected to the module 822 via the wire 827, and the _^ is connected to the #71?. X to receive the signal 16 and forward it to the right, and, and so as to be connected from the module 22 to the π u Transfer to the area around the vehicle 800. The module 822 includes circuitry (including DSP) similar to the 装置, 曰 装置 34 device for transmitting data and encoding the data as described for the IR trajectory I06124.doc of the Navigator 826. 55. 1335154. The input data can be digital or analog, and thus the group 822 can include one or more ADCs to accept analog data and digitize it for encoding as disclosed herein. The manufacturer of the vehicle 8 can pre-install the subsystem 820, thereby allowing subsequent purchasers of the vehicle to install the customized IR device based on what is required or required as described below, without the need for extra labor, complicated additional wiring. installation. Module 822 can receive a variety of data including analog or digital video data from camera 83A for transmission to audio device 34 via transmitter/receivers 826, 8〇6 (and optionally via 8 1 0). The audio device can include or be coupled to a video display 831 for displaying audio data received from the camera 83. A camera 83 can be mounted to the rear of the vehicle to provide an instant display of the vehicle behind the vehicle 8 and substantially serve as a warning to warn the driver if another vehicle or other obstacle is too close to the vehicle 8 And / or proximity sensor (pr0ximity sens〇r). Module 822 can also receive audio input from an audio device such as a microphone 832. Microphone 832 can be used as an audio monitor, such as a baby monitor as previously described, or a medical monitor for a patient traveling in the posterior portion of vehicle 800. As previously described, the person wearing the headset 80 can also use the microphone 835 to access a mobile telephone device (or a civilian band radio (CB to (1) Magic, or any other type of wireless communication device) connected to the audio device 34 for action. The phone or other communication device receives and conducts a conversation. Accordingly, the microphone 832 can be physically separate from the headset 80 or can be plugged into the headset 80. The headset 80 or microphone 835 can be plugged into certain controls to access the mobile phone or Features of other communication devices, such as hang up, dialing, volume control, and communication channel selection. 106124.doc • 56- Module 8 2 2 Available from batch gg. η Fenggong β 33 accepts data such as patient monitoring (eg heartbeat, The basin 833 is physically applicable to the person who is traveling in the vehicle 8〇〇, and the two can be strangely monitored. 833 can be any other device, and thus can be used for the brewing monitor to report the container 'rf' to the driver of the vehicle 800 such as, for example, Food transport clothing The food granulator that the company is transporting. The system 801 can be installed in steps (for example) in the passenger seat (4) ^ for passengers sitting in the back seat (for clarity, passengers are not shown in Figure 2) The display device 838 includes an IR receiver 839 for receiving an IR signal 16 containing, for example, video information from the DVD player 8〇3 or from the camera (4). The game control device 836 may also be used. Connected to the module for communication with a video game player 837 connected to the audio device 34. In this embodiment, the passenger can wear the headset 80 to listen to the audio and video transmitted by the video game device 837 for transmission by the audio device 34. A oundtrack of the game software of the signal. The video signal can be displayed to the passenger on the display device 838, and the passenger can enter and enter the game via a game control device (eg, joystick, touch pad, mouse, etc.) 836. The game software interaction executed on the module 822 can further output the audio data to the audio speaker 842, thereby eliminating the need for the speaker to extend from the front of the vehicle 8 to the rear for the speaker. The speaker 842 can be powered by the vehicle power supply, in which case it can include an amplifier for amplifying the audio signal received from the module 822. Alternatively, the module 822 can include processing the received signal 16 as an analog audio signal IU6l24. .doc -57- 1335154 and all of the circuitry (including the DAC) needed to amplify the analog signal before it is supplied to the speaker 842. The channel played via the speaker 842 can be = by the audio device 34 (ie, by the vehicle 8 The driver of the device or any other input device including the game control device 836 (i.e., by the passenger in the vehicle) is selected and can be transmitted from the audio device for decoding of the parent package in the module 822. The channel so selected is indicated in the header. In other embodiments of the aforementioned encoding mechanisms, such as those described with respect to Figure 12, the data may be configured in a transmission buffer in various other configurations to reduce the processing power consumption of the receiver. As an example, all of the data representing a channel can be stored sequentially in the buffer (and subsequently transmitted), followed by the next channel, and the like. If a channel or channels are not available, they can be identified in the header of each packet. In this manner, the receiver Dsp can be powered down during the time when the inactive channel data is being received. When - or multiple channels are inactive, the transmitter can set the bandwidth of each channel, e.g., by sampling the incoming audio data at a higher rate to provide a higher quality digital bit stream. Alternatively, the transmitter may utilize the excess capacity by adding error detection and/or correction features, such as containing redundant samples or advanced error correction information such as Reed-Salomon values. In order to minimize the reception error, the number of audio samples included in each packet can be used in the number of errors experienced by the receiver and in the model. This feature would require some feedback from the receiver regarding the error experienced, based on which the transmitter DSP can be programmed to contain fewer audio samples per packet. I06l24.doc -5S- 1335154 Other error detection mechanisms can also be used. As an example, the code is randomly changed, and the location ^ is inserted into the data block - the position ^ is also the same as @石民枯. Or, you can use the phase, flat mom value. The (equal) position of the (equal) value can also be randomly changed from packet to packet to remove the shadow of the fixed frequency error. In #4, this (etc.) 仂 了 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在 在Matching the damage in the head...

^ 。頭中所規疋之值’則DSP可由於該封包含 有誤差而將其吾棄且視情況可如先前所述般將輸出靜音。 =了保留帶寬並增強處理效率’該(等)編碼值可含有額 外貝讯’意即,編碼值,而不是隨機值,可表示(例如)作 用中及非作用中頻道。將較佳地將編碼值置放於指派給每 一作用中頻道之資料區塊之至少—位置處,以確保該值在 收聽者所選擇之頻道中以供Dsp處理。在另—實施例中, 可使用夕個編碼值,每一編碼值表示不同系統變數或其它 資訊(例如,一編碼值指示作用中頻道,另一編碼值含有 總和檢查值(check-sum value),另-編碼值含有用於前向 誤差校正之裏德-薩洛蒙值,等)。 在諸如系統801之雙向系統中,耳機8〇可包含一汛傳輸 态,以使接收器DSP能夠將接收誤差值傳輸至關於所接收 資料之音訊裝置34。基於此等值,傳輸器DSp可採取某些 块差杈正動作,其包含重新傳輸不良資料封包,調節資料 封包大小(例如’當誤差率在預定臨限值以上時,傳輸含 有較少資料之封包,或按接收誤差率之函數來動態調節每 I06124.doc -59- 1335154 封包之資料量),及增加IR傳輸器18所產生之傳輸功率。 /見 &gt; 看圖2 1,在一替代性實施例中,車輛9〇〇包含通訊 系統9〇1。如關於其它實施例所論述,通訊系統9〇1可包含 丄由(右干)電線804固線式連接至光傳輸器/接收器之音 裝置34通汛系統901亦可包含ir傳輸器部分1 8,其用 以自曰汛裝置34接收編碼資料,且用以控制光傳輸器/接 收器806並為其供電以發射光學脈衝之數位位元流。如圖 1 8中所不,為了安裝、修理 '維護及升級之簡易,汛傳輸 :° ί5刀18可獨立於音訊裝置μ而提供,或或者其可包含於 音訊裝置34内。 音訊裝置34可提供複數個頻道之音訊及其它資料,且被 展不為接收來自DVD播放器8〇3之音訊及視訊資料,來自 輔助音訊裝置922(例如MP3播放器、數位衛星無線電調諧 器、視訊遊戲機等)及行動電話8〇5之音訊及/或視訊資料, 來自全球定位系統(GPS)單元92〇之地理位置資料及來自 監控並控制車輛9〇〇之各種功能之車輛中央處理單元 (CPU)924之各種車輛資料(例如遙測資訊如先前所述, 通訊系統901可提供雙向通訊,且音訊裝置34因此亦可接 爻由傳輸器/接收器806自車輛900中之其它ir裝置接收之 資料並將資料引導至諸如車輛cpu 924及行動電話8〇5之裝 置。CPU 924可自攝像機/接近度感測器830接收諸如接近 度資訊之資訊,以便向車輛9〇〇之司機顯示適當之視訊晝 面或警告。 繼續參看圖21,通訊系統9〇1可進—步包含通訊子系統 I06l24.doc -60· 1335154 92丨,其包含經由(若干)電線827固線式連接至通訊模組923 之IR接收器/傳輸器926,如其它處關於模組822(圖17)所 述,通訊模組923可固線式連接至攝影機/接近度感測器 830以便自攝影機接收資料並經由汛接收器/傳輸器926、 6及曰几4置34將其傳輸至車輛cpu 924。模組923亦可 自音訊裝置34接收音訊資料,且將音訊資料提供至可安裝 於車廂中或(如圖示)安裝於車輛9〇〇之後座下方的子低音揚 聲器942。另外,模組923亦可固線式連接至安裝於車廂之 CD變換益950,且自該CD變換器接受音訊資料以將其傳輸 至音訊裝置34以供在車輛900内重放,並且接收由車輛司 機經由音訊裝置34輸入用以控制CD變換器之控制命令, 諸如CD及執道選擇、隨機播放(shuffle)、重複等。 模組923可包含一或多個DAC,以如其它處所述般對自 音訊裝置34接收之音訊資料解碼並為子低音揚聲器942將 已解瑪資料轉換為類比形式。或者,子低音揚聲器942可 包含DAC,且因此能夠直接自模組923接受已解碼數位音 訊資料。模組923亦可包含一或多個舰,則更自攝影機 830及CD變換器950接受類比資料,將其轉換為數位形 式,如本A中其它處所述對其編碼,並將其傳輸至音訊裝 置34。車輛CPU 924可連接至通訊系統9〇1,以將關於車輛 之遙測資訊傳送至CPU。舉例而纟,輪胎壓力監控器952 可安置於車輛_之後方區域中’且可固線式連接至模組 923以將關於後輪胎壓力之資訊傳輸至車輛cpu似。以此 方式’通訊系統9〇1之用途可延伸超出娱樂功能至車輛操 I06l24.doc -61. 1335154 作功能。在另一實施例中,IR接收器/傳輸器926可倂入一 中繼器,其用以自車輛900中之任何IR傳輸器接收汛訊 號,放大所接收之IR訊號,並重新傳輸所接收之訊號以供 車輛中之其它IR接收器接收。 無線揚聲器940可安裝於車輛9〇〇之門中或安裝於任何其 它可行位置,且包含1R接收器/傳輸器941»較佳地,揚聲 器94〇包含一用以解碼自IR接收器/傳輸器8〇6、926接收之 編碼數位音訊資料之DSp及一用以將解碼音訊資料轉換 為頬比形式以供在車輛9〇〇内重放之DAC。揚聲器94〇及子 低曰揚聲器942均需要電源,其可由車輛9〇〇電源(諸如自 電源至車輛之尾燈)提供。 仍 &gt; 看圖21 ’雙向耳機980包含ir接收器/傳輸器982及 麥克風984。IR接收器/傳輸器982經由資料之光學位元流 絰由IR接收器/傳輸器8〇6或視情況可經由包含如先前所述 之中繼器的1R接收器/傳輸器926與音訊裝置34通訊。雙向 耳機980可用以經由音訊裝置34存取行動電話,以發出 乎叫亚進仃雙向交談。雙向耳機98〇可包含用於撥號之數 子墊,或或者音訊裝置34可包含聲音辨識能力,以允許使 用者93 3(使用耳機98〇)僅選擇預定頻道來發出電話呼叫且 接著藉由說出命令至麥克風984中來啟動並操作行動電話 805又向耳機980可進一步包含連接至麥克風984之 ADC,其用以數位化使用者933之聲音,以供如本文中其 匕處所述進行編碼及IR傳輸。雙向耳機較佳亦提供如 先鈉所述之由耳機8〇提供之其它功能,其包含控制音訊音 106124.doc •62· 里及選擇複數個通訊頻道之一。 繼續參看圖21,遠程控制器936包含用於經由IR接收器/ t輸器806及(視情況)包含於IR接收器/傳輸器926中之中繼 裔來與音訊裝置34雙向通訊之以接收器/傳輸器m。遠程 控制益936可提供複數個控制之任何一或多個,該等控制 i s但不限於鍵盤、操縱桿、按鈕、觸發開關及聲音命令 控制,其可it 一步提供諸如音訊或觸覺/振動之感觀反 饋。遠程控制器936可用於各種目的,其包含如先前所述 之存取並控制行動電話805。遠程控制器936亦可用以存取 亚控制視訊遊戲機922來玩顯示於(若干)視訊顯示器838上 之視讯遊戲,且經由耳機8〇、98〇播放遊戲音執(叫以〇 track)。遠程控制器936可進一步用以控制視訊顯示器Mg 並調節顯示功能及控制,以控制dvd播放器803在視訊顯 示姦8 3 8上顯示電影並控制其功能(例如,暫停、停止、快 進)’以便控制安裝於車廂之CD變換器95〇 ,請求來自車輛 CPU 924之遙測資料顯示於視訊顯示器838上,或控制諸如 將鎖/開門及開/關窗之其它車輛9〇〇功能。可將兩個或兩個 以上之遠程控制器936提供於車輛9〇〇中,以允許兩個或兩 们以上之使用者933、935玩視訊遊戲,該遊戲個別地顯示 於多個、各個視訊顯示器838上。每一遠程控制器936可經 由獨立通訊頻道存取音訊裝置34及視訊遊戲機922,且因 此使遊戲機能夠經由各個視訊顯示器838及耳機98〇、8〇將 不同個別視讯及音訊流提供至每一各個使用者933、 935可將耳機80、980進一步程式化為自遠程控制器936 I06124.doc • 63· 1335154 接收IR訊號,以選擇另—頻道或基於使用者所選之功能 (例如,玩視訊遊戲、觀看DVD)而自動選擇適當頻道。 可將耳機80之DSP 76程式化為識別不同音訊裝置34,諸 如可在車輛中或家中找到之裝置。每一音訊裝置34可因此 在每一資料封包中之標頭中包含進一步資訊,以提供唯一 硪別碼。DSP 76可進一步包含可程式化記憶體,以儲存關 於每一音訊裝置34之各種使用者可選擇之選擇,耳機肋之 使用者可希望自該音訊裝置34接收音訊及其它資料。因 此,作為實例,可將DSP 76程式化為當自安裝於車輛之音 ,裝置3 4接收資料時接收並解碼預定數量之立體聲及/或 早聲音訊頻道’並程式化為當自連接至家庭影院系統之音 T裝置34接收資料時接收並解碼六個單聲音訊資料頻道以 提供真正之5.1音訊體驗。 在另一實施例中,耳機80可具有使用者可訂製之特徵, 諸士對於每一可用頻道可調節至不同值且當使用者選擇各 個頻道時自動偵測並應用之音調控制(例如低音、高音)。 另外,亦可為個別音訊裝置34(諸如上述之車輛中音訊裝 置及家中音訊裝置)設定訂製特徵。耳機8〇因此可具有諸 如低音及高音控制之額外控制,及其它訊號處理選擇(例 如’全景、音樂廳等訂製設定可保存為包含於耳機⑼ 内之記憶It中的耳機設定檀’纟可為任何類型之可擦記憶 體。或者,對於雙向耳機980,可將使用者所調節^訂製 特徵值傳輸至音訊裝置34 ’以供健存於該音訊裝置内之記 憶體中’ 1可接著將此等訂製值嵌入表示待由耳機98〇恢 I06124.doc -64- 1335154 復並應用於所選頻道之訊號 ^ 頻道之資料流中(例如 資料封包之標頭中)。 貝·n u 丁〈例如 或者,可經由音訊裝詈 μ 調即訂製特徵,以使得即使單 向耳機80也可享有訂製之机… 丨使早 D又疋。在由音訊裝置34將訂製之 特徵儲存於記憶體中之實絲 暮之 + _ 貫%例中,每-組個別耳機80及/ 或980可具有個別識別之構 反丨 /、可由使用者經由提供於 耳機上之控制來輸入(例如,將耳機 三號等)°㈣㈣將允許音訊裝置在表示待由每-組耳 機恢復之每一頻道的資料、, 只、J貝枓机中為每組耳機嵌入訂製設定, 其後’每一組耳機將識 引亚選擇其自身之適當組之訂製設 定’以應用於該特定組耳撼夕姑1 ^映 斗機1之使用者所選擇之頻道的訊 號。^. The value stated in the header' then the DSP may discard the output because it contains errors and may mute the output as previously described. = Retaining bandwidth and enhancing processing efficiency 'This (etc.) encoded value may contain extras, ie, encoded values, rather than random values, may represent, for example, active and inactive channels. Preferably, the encoded value is placed at at least the location assigned to the data block of each active channel to ensure that the value is in the channel selected by the listener for Dsp processing. In another embodiment, an eve code value may be used, each code value representing a different system variable or other information (eg, one code value indicating an active channel and another code value having a check-sum value) , the other-encoded value contains the Reed-Salmon value for forward error correction, etc.). In a two-way system such as system 801, the headset 8 can include a transmission state to enable the receiver DSP to transmit the received error value to the audio device 34 with respect to the received data. Based on this value, the transmitter DSp can take some block difference positive action, which includes retransmitting the bad data packet and adjusting the data packet size (for example, when the error rate is above the predetermined threshold, the transmission contains less data. The packet, or dynamically adjusts the amount of data per I06124.doc -59 - 1335154 packet as a function of the received error rate, and increases the transmission power generated by the IR transmitter 18. / See &gt; Looking at Figure 2, in an alternative embodiment, the vehicle 9A includes a communication system 9〇1. As discussed with respect to other embodiments, the communication system 910 may include an audio device 34 that is fixedly connected to the optical transmitter/receiver by a (right-hand) wire 804. The 汛 system 901 may also include an ir transmitter portion 1 8. A digital bit stream for receiving coded data from the device 34 and for controlling and powering the optical transmitter/receiver 806 to transmit optical pulses. As shown in Fig. 18, in order to install and repair the 'maintenance and upgrade's simplicity, the transmission: ° ί5 knife 18 can be provided independently of the audio device μ, or it can be included in the audio device 34. The audio device 34 can provide audio and other data of a plurality of channels, and is not adapted to receive audio and video data from the DVD player 8〇3, from the auxiliary audio device 922 (eg, an MP3 player, a digital satellite radio tuner, Video game equipment, etc.) and mobile telephone 8〇5 audio and/or video data, geographical location data from the Global Positioning System (GPS) unit 92, and vehicle central processing unit from various functions of monitoring and controlling the vehicle 9〇〇 Various vehicle data of (CPU) 924 (e.g., telemetry information. As previously described, communication system 901 can provide two-way communication, and audio device 34 can therefore be received by transmitter/receiver 806 from other ir devices in vehicle 900. The data is directed to devices such as vehicle cpu 924 and mobile phone 8〇 5. CPU 924 can receive information such as proximity information from camera/proximity sensor 830 for display to the driver of vehicle 9 Video camera or warning. With continued reference to Figure 21, the communication system 9〇1 can further include the communication subsystem I06l24.doc -60· 1335154 92丨, which includes The (several) wire 827 is fixedly connected to the IR receiver/transmitter 926 of the communication module 923. As described elsewhere with respect to the module 822 (FIG. 17), the communication module 923 can be fixedly connected to the camera/ The proximity sensor 830 is configured to receive data from the camera and transmit it to the vehicle cpu 924 via the 汛 receiver/transmitters 926, 6 and 34 34. The module 923 can also receive audio data from the audio device 34, and The audio data is provided to a subwoofer 942 that can be installed in the car or (as shown) installed under the seat of the vehicle 9 。. In addition, the module 923 can also be fixedly connected to the CD converter installed in the car. 950, and receiving audio data from the CD converter for transmission to the audio device 34 for playback within the vehicle 900, and receiving control commands input by the vehicle driver via the audio device 34 for controlling the CD converter, such as a CD And arbitrarily selected, shuffled, repeated, etc. The module 923 can include one or more DACs to decode the audio data received from the audio device 34 as described elsewhere and for the subwoofer 942 Xima data transfer In analogy, the subwoofer 942 can include a DAC, and thus can receive decoded digital audio data directly from the module 923. The module 923 can also include one or more ships, and more from the camera 830 and the CD converter. The 950 accepts the analog data, converts it to digital form, encodes it as described elsewhere in this A, and transmits it to the audio device 34. The vehicle CPU 924 can be connected to the communication system 9〇1 to The telemetry information is transmitted to the CPU. For example, the tire pressure monitor 952 can be placed in the vehicle_rear area and can be fixedly connected to the module 923 to transmit information about the rear tire pressure to the vehicle cpu. In this way, the use of the communication system 9〇1 can extend beyond the entertainment function to the vehicle operation I06l24.doc -61. 1335154. In another embodiment, the IR receiver/transmitter 926 can incorporate a repeater for receiving a chirp signal from any of the IR transmitters in the vehicle 900, amplifying the received IR signal, and retransmitting the received signal. The signal is received by other IR receivers in the vehicle. The wireless speaker 940 can be mounted in the door of the vehicle 9 or installed in any other feasible location, and includes a 1R receiver/transmitter 941» preferably, the speaker 94 includes a decoder for decoding from the IR receiver/transmitter 8〇6, 926 receives the DSp of the encoded digital audio data and a DAC for converting the decoded audio data into an analog form for playback in the vehicle 9〇〇. Both the speaker 94 and the sub-lower speaker 942 require a power source that can be provided by the vehicle 9 〇〇 power source, such as from the power source to the taillights of the vehicle. Still &gt; See Figure 21' The two-way headset 980 includes an ir receiver/transmitter 982 and a microphone 984. The IR receiver/transmitter 982 flows through the optical bits of the data by the IR receiver/transmitter 8〇6 or optionally via the 1R receiver/transmitter 926 and the audio device comprising the repeater as previously described. 34 communications. The two-way headset 980 can be used to access the mobile phone via the audio device 34 to issue a two-way conversation. The two-way headset 98A may include a number of sub-pads for dialing, or the audio device 34 may include voice recognition capabilities to allow the user 93 3 (using the headset 98 〇) to select only a predetermined channel to place a telephone call and then by saying The command is sent to the microphone 984 to activate and operate the mobile phone 805. The headset 980 can further include an ADC coupled to the microphone 984 for digitizing the sound of the user 933 for encoding as described elsewhere herein. And IR transmission. The two-way earphone preferably also provides other functions provided by the earphone 8 as described in the first hand, which includes controlling the audio tone 106124.doc • 62· and selecting one of the plurality of communication channels. With continued reference to FIG. 21, the remote controller 936 includes two-way communication with the audio device 34 for receiving via the IR receiver/t transmitter 806 and (as appropriate) the relays included in the IR receiver/transmitter 926. / transmitter m. The remote control benefit 936 can provide any one or more of a plurality of controls, but not limited to a keyboard, a joystick, a button, a trigger switch, and a voice command control, which can provide a sense of audio or tactile/vibration in one step. View feedback. Remote controller 936 can be used for a variety of purposes including accessing and controlling mobile phone 805 as previously described. The remote controller 936 can also be used to access the sub-control video game console 922 to play the video game displayed on the video display 838, and play the game sound via the headphones 8〇, 98〇. The remote controller 936 can be further configured to control the video display device Mg and adjust the display function and control to control the dvd player 803 to display the movie on the video display and control its function (eg, pause, stop, fast forward). In order to control the CD changer 95A installed in the vehicle, the telemetry data from the vehicle CPU 924 is requested to be displayed on the video display 838, or other vehicles such as the lock/open door and the open/close window are controlled. Two or more remote controllers 936 may be provided in the vehicle 9 to allow two or more users 933, 935 to play video games, the games being individually displayed in multiple, individual video On display 838. Each remote controller 936 can access the audio device 34 and the video game console 922 via an independent communication channel, and thus enable the gaming machine to provide different individual video and audio streams to each of the video display devices 838 and the headsets 98, 8 Each of the users 933, 935 can further program the headsets 80, 980 to receive an IR signal from the remote controller 936 I06124.doc • 63· 1335154 to select another channel or based on a function selected by the user (eg, Play video games, watch DVDs and automatically select the appropriate channel. The DSP 76 of the headset 80 can be programmed to recognize different audio devices 34, such as those found in a vehicle or at home. Each audio device 34 can therefore include further information in the header of each data packet to provide a unique identification code. The DSP 76 can further include programmable memory to store various user selectable options for each of the audio devices 34, and the user of the earphone ribs can desire to receive audio and other data from the audio device 34. Thus, as an example, the DSP 76 can be programmed to receive and decode a predetermined number of stereo and/or early audio channels when self-installed in the vehicle, while the device 34 receives the data and is programmed to be self-connected to the home. The theater system tone T device 34 receives and decodes six single audio data channels to provide a true 5.1 audio experience when receiving data. In another embodiment, the headset 80 can have user-customizable features that can be adjusted to different values for each available channel and automatically detected and applied to the tone control (eg, bass) when the user selects each channel. , treble). In addition, custom features can be set for individual audio devices 34, such as the above-described audio devices in the vehicle and home audio devices. The earphone 8 can therefore have additional controls such as bass and treble control, as well as other signal processing options (eg 'panoramic, concert hall and other custom settings can be saved as a set of headphones in the memory It included in the headset (9). For any type of erasable memory, or for the two-way headphone 980, the user-adjusted feature value can be transmitted to the audio device 34' for storage in the memory in the audio device. These custom values are embedded in the data stream representing the signal ^ channel that is to be copied by the headset 98 and restored to the selected channel (for example, in the header of the data packet). <For example, the feature can be customized via the audio device so that even the one-way earphone 80 can enjoy the customized machine... The early D is again 疋. The customized feature is stored in the audio device 34. In the example of the solid volume in the memory, each of the individual earphones 80 and/or 980 may have an individual identification/input/can be input by the user via the control provided on the earphone (for example, Headphones three Etc.) (4) (4) will allow the audio device to embed the custom settings for each set of headphones in the data representing each channel to be restored by each set of headphones, then the 'each set of headphones will recognize引亚 selects its own appropriate set of custom settings 'to apply to the channel of the channel selected by the user of the particular group of players.

除了汀製耳機設定檔以外,可允許使用者規定個別使用 者設定檔,該等設定檔規定車輛9〇〇内之耳機之每一個別 使用者之特定設定偏好。此等個別設定檔可儲存於音訊裝 置34中,且如上所述在資料流内傳輸。在此實施例中,每 一使用者可需要經由所選耳機8〇之控制來輸入唯一識別 碼’以使其自身能被耳機識別,耳機可經程式化以接著提 取佩戴耳機之使用者的個別使用者設定檔並將該設定檔中 之訂製設定應用於使用者所選頻道之訊號。可將此等設定 檔嵌入每一資料封包中,或可當第一次對音訊裝置34加電 時僅傳輸其一次,或或者可以規則時間間隔傳輸其。或 者’車輛900内之每一組耳機80可將所有使用者設定檔儲 存於記憶體中,且可間歇地更新該等設定檔或每次對音訊 I06124.doc • 65· 1335154 裝置34加電時更新該等設定檔。 現參看圖22,將通訊系統提供於車輛988中,其中該車 輛包含資料匯流排990。資料匯流排990連接至車輛CPU 924並延伸遍及整個車輛988,以將該車輛内之各種裝置 (例如,攝影機83 0、CD變換器950)連接至CPU。如圖示, 資料匯流排990可延伸穿過車輛988之頂襯,或可採取穿過 車輛至所連接之所要裝置的替代路徑。資料匯流排可為光 纖匯流排或可為電子有線匯流排,且可以各種傳輸速度及 帶寬操作。在一實施例中,資料匯流排990可根據藍芽 (Bluetooth)無線通訊標準或根據用於光纖網路之媒體導向 系統傳輸(MOST)通訊標準而操作。 通訊系統991包含安裝於車輛988内之一或多個位置處並 連接至資料匯流排990之IR模組992。每一 IR模組992可含 有一 IR接收器(光接收器),且另外可含有一 IR傳輸器(例 如,一或多個LED)。如先前所述,亦可將一中繼器倂入每 一 IR模組992中,以重新傳輸所接收之IR訊號。另外,每 一 IR模組992包含用於經介面與資料匯流排990連接之電路 (例如,網路介面卡),以讀取正在匯流排上傳輸之資料並 將資料轉換為IR訊號以供LED傳輸,且亦以將所接收IR訊 號轉換為匯流排所接受之資料格式並將匯流排上之此種資 料傳輸至音訊裝置34或任何連接至該匯流排之其它裝置。 介面電路可進一步包含一緩衝器或快取記憶體,其用以在 IR接收器及/或傳輸器以不同於資料匯流排990之速度操作 的情況下緩衝資料。 106124.doc •66· 在此貝她例中’不需要音訊裝置34為通訊系統991之中 央控制單元’反而’其可為分散式系統,Mir模組992 使車輛988内部之任何IR裝置能夠與以相容編碼機制操作 之任何其它IR裝置或與連接至資料匯流排99〇之任何其它 、置、k &quot;面連接。II由適當定址並識別在資料匯流排99〇 上傳輸之資料(例如,㉟由置放於每-資料區塊或資料封 包之標頭中之資訊)’連接至資料匯流排之每一裝置可識 別需要其解碼並使用之資料之頻道,且可視情況為其指派 唯位址,希望接收之資料可唯一定址至該位址。此混合 路可易於擴大’因為不需要額外配線來將額外裝置連接In addition to the Ting Headphone Profile, the user is allowed to specify individual user profiles that specify specific preferences for each individual user of the headset within the vehicle. These individual profiles can be stored in the audio device 34 and transmitted within the data stream as described above. In this embodiment, each user may need to enter a unique identification code via the control of the selected headset 8 to enable itself to be recognized by the headset, which can be programmed to subsequently extract the individual of the user wearing the headset. The user profile and the custom settings in the profile are applied to the signal of the channel selected by the user. These profiles may be embedded in each data packet, or may be transmitted only once when the audio device 34 is powered up for the first time, or may be transmitted at regular time intervals. Or 'each set of headsets 80 in the vehicle 900 can store all user profiles in the memory, and can update the profiles intermittently or each time the audio I06124.doc • 65· 1335154 device 34 is powered up Update these profiles. Referring now to Figure 22, a communication system is provided in a vehicle 988, wherein the vehicle includes a data bus 990. Data bus 990 is coupled to vehicle CPU 924 and extends throughout vehicle 988 to connect various devices within the vehicle (e.g., camera 83 0, CD converter 950) to the CPU. As illustrated, the data bus 990 can extend through the top lining of the vehicle 988 or can take an alternate path through the vehicle to the desired device to which it is connected. The data bus can be a fiber bus or can be an electronic wire bus and can operate at various transmission speeds and bandwidths. In one embodiment, data bus 990 can operate in accordance with Bluetooth wireless communication standards or according to Media Oriented System Transport (MOST) communication standards for fiber optic networks. Communication system 991 includes an IR module 992 that is mounted at one or more locations within vehicle 988 and coupled to data bus 990. Each IR module 992 can include an IR receiver (light receiver) and can additionally include an IR transmitter (e.g., one or more LEDs). As previously described, a repeater can also be incorporated into each IR module 992 to retransmit the received IR signals. In addition, each IR module 992 includes circuitry (eg, a network interface card) for connecting to the data bus 990 via the interface to read the data being transmitted on the bus and convert the data into an IR signal for the LED. The transmission is also performed by converting the received IR signal into a data format accepted by the bus and transmitting such data on the bus to the audio device 34 or any other device connected to the bus. The interface circuitry can further include a buffer or cache memory for buffering data when the IR receiver and/or transmitter operate at a different speed than the data bus 990. 106124.doc • 66. In this example, 'there is no need for the audio device 34 to be the central control unit of the communication system 991' instead of being a decentralized system, and the Mir module 992 enables any IR device within the vehicle 988 to Any other IR device operating in a compatible encoding mechanism or connected to any other, k&quot; face connected to the data bus 99. II by properly addressing and identifying the data transmitted on the data bus 99 (for example, 35 by the information placed in the header of each data block or data packet) 'connected to each device of the data bus A channel that identifies the data it needs to decode and use, and optionally assigns a unique address to it, and the data it wishes to receive can be uniquely addressed to that address. This hybrid can be easily expanded' because no additional wiring is required to connect additional devices

至ό亥網路;反而,每一 ^ -τ Vit T 新l置可配備有一 IR傳輸器/接收 器,其允許該裝置經由無線介面之—連接至該網路。 現參看圖23 ’在另—實施例中,將通訊系統1GGG提供於 建築物1010中’其中該建築物包含通訊網路1020。網路 1〇20可為有線或無線區域網路(LAN),諸如遵守 8〇2_l1(WiFi)之無線(RF)網路。或者,網路1〇2〇可僅為(例 如)連接至本地電纜電視(cable televisi〇n)公司網路1⑽2之 有線資料管線。如此項技術者已知,網路1〇2〇可因此斑電 規網路贈經介面連接,以接收諸如電視及音樂頻道I媒 體内容,且進,步經由電纜數據機ι〇24提供至因特網的連 接。 網路1020包含無線(無線電)RF收發器1〇3〇,其固線式連 接至該網路並安裝於建築物1〇1〇之房間1〇11中以便經由rf 訊號1032傳播在遍及整個建築物之網路上流動之資料。為 I06l24.doc -67· 1335154 使遍及整個建築物10 10之來自多個RF傳輸器之RF干擾最 小化’建築物中之房間1012可配備有介面編碼器/解碼器 1040,其連接至用以自載運來自網路1〇2〇之資料的rf傳輪 器1〇3〇接收灯訊號1〇32iRF天線1034。解碼器/編碼器 1040可接著如本文中其它處所述(例如,關於圖1〇之論述) 對所接收之網路訊號編碼,並驅動IR傳輸器/接收器1〇5〇 之1R發光二極體發射載運網路資料之IR訊號1052。在該房 間中諸如個人電腦(PC)1060之裝置可配備有用以接收汛訊 號1052之IR傳輸器/接收器1〇7〇,且編碼器/解碼器ι〇8〇自 該IR訊號提取資料,並且對來自PC之資料編碼並將其作為 IR訊號1062傳輸,介面解碼器/編碼器1〇4〇將經由傳輸器/ 接收器1 050接收該IR訊號,介面編碼器/解碼器1〇4〇可接 著解碼或解多工由來自PC 1〇6〇tIR訊號1〇62所載運之資 料,並將其繼續傳送至RF天線1034,RF天線1〇34又將該 資料作為RF訊號1 〇36傳輸,收發器1 〇3〇將接收該等RF訊 號並將其通訊至網路1 〇20。 繼續參看圖23,建築物1010之房間1〇13可配備有家庭影 院系統1100,其連接至網路1020以接收電視及音訊節目 (programming)。該家庭影院系統亦可連接至解碼器丨丨〗〇, 以自該家庭影院系統之前置放大器接收一或多個頻道之音 訊並驅動IR傳輸器i i 20(如本文中其它處所述)將該等頻道 之音訊作為ΠΙ訊號1122傳輸。如先前所述,房間m2中諸 如無線耳機丨4及遠程揚㈣可各配備有爪接收 器70及用於解碼IR訊號1122之解碼器電路。以訊號⑴2可 I06124.doc * 68 - 1335154 為每一揚聲器1130載運諸如5個頻道之單聲音訊之音訊資 訊,從而形成所謂之5.1音訊系統。IR訊號亦可載運多個 頻道之音訊,以使得佩戴耳機14之收聽者1150可選擇收聽 不同於正由揚聲器1130播放之音訊頻道之音訊頻道。必須 瞭解,許多其它類型之裝置可無線連接至網路1020 ,其包 含但不限於,電話、傳真機、電視、無線電、視訊遊戲 器、個人數位助理、為遠程控制配備之各種家用電器,及 豕庭安全系統。To the όHai network; instead, each ^ -τ Vit T can be equipped with an IR transmitter/receiver that allows the device to connect to the network via the wireless interface. Referring now to Figure 23, in another embodiment, a communication system 1GGG is provided in a building 1010 wherein the building includes a communication network 1020. The network 1〇20 can be a wired or wireless local area network (LAN), such as a wireless (RF) network that complies with 8〇2_l1 (WiFi). Alternatively, the network port 2 can be, for example, connected to a wired data line of the local cable television (cable televisi〇n) company network 1 (10) 2. As is known to those skilled in the art, the network can be connected to receive media content such as television and music channel I, and the step is provided to the Internet via the cable modem ι 24 Connection. The network 1020 includes a wireless (radio) RF transceiver 1〇3〇 that is fixedly connected to the network and installed in the room 1〇11 of the building for propagation via the rf signal 1032 throughout the building. Information flowing on the Internet of Things. I06l24.doc -67· 1335154 minimizes RF interference from multiple RF transmitters throughout the building 10 10 'Room 1012 in a building may be equipped with an interface encoder/decoder 1040 that is connected to The rf-passenger 1〇3〇 receiving the light signal from the network 1〇2〇 receives the light signal 1〇32iRF antenna 1034. The decoder/encoder 1040 can then encode the received network signal as described elsewhere herein (eg, as discussed with respect to FIG. 1A) and drive the IR transmitter/receiver 1〇5发光1R illumination two. The polar body emits an IR signal 1052 that carries the network data. A device such as a personal computer (PC) 1060 in the room may be equipped with an IR transmitter/receiver 1 〇 7 有用 for receiving the signal 1052, and the encoder/decoder 〇 8 extracts data from the IR signal. And the data from the PC is encoded and transmitted as the IR signal 1062, and the interface decoder/encoder 1〇4〇 will receive the IR signal via the transmitter/receiver 1 050, the interface encoder/decoder 1〇4〇 The data carried by the PC 1〇6〇tIR signal 1〇62 can then be decoded or demultiplexed and transmitted to the RF antenna 1034, which in turn transmits the data as RF signal 1 〇36. The transceiver 1 〇3〇 will receive the RF signals and communicate them to the network 1 〇20. With continued reference to Figure 23, the room 1〇13 of the building 1010 can be equipped with a home theater system 1100 that is coupled to the network 1020 for receiving television and audio programming. The home theater system can also be coupled to a decoder to receive audio from one or more channels from the home theater system preamplifier and drive the IR transmitter ii 20 (as described elsewhere herein) The audio of these channels is transmitted as the signal 1122. As previously described, the room m2, such as the wireless headset 4 and the remote speaker (4), can each be provided with a jaw receiver 70 and a decoder circuit for decoding the IR signal 1122. The signal (1) 2 can be I06124.doc * 68 - 1335154 for each speaker 1130 carrying a voice signal of a single voice such as 5 channels, thereby forming a so-called 5.1 audio system. The IR signal can also carry audio for multiple channels such that the listener 1150 wearing the headset 14 can choose to listen to an audio channel other than the audio channel being played by the speaker 1130. It must be understood that many other types of devices can be wirelessly connected to the network 1020, including but not limited to, telephones, fax machines, televisions, radios, video game consoles, personal digital assistants, various home appliances for remote control, and/or Court security system.

混合系統1000因此利用RF訊號傳播穿過牆壁之能力,但 是使此等情形中可發生之RF干擾最小化。系統1〇〇〇亦為高 度靈活的,且允許將諸如PC 1060之多個額外裝置連接至 諸如網路1020之有線網路而無需實際上在建築物中安裝任 何額外電纜或配線。反而,單一介面編碼器/解碼器丨〇4〇 需要安裝於該建築物之每一房間中,且如此配備之任何房 間中之裝置可接著經由諸如解碼器u丨〇之單向解碼器或諸 如編碼器/解碼器.1080之雙向編碼器/解碼器而連接至網路 1020。以此方式,可容易地且成本有效地將較舊之建築彩 翻新為具有必備之網路/通訊能力之建築物現代辦公室。 現參看圖24, n車輛(n vehicle)8〇〇可配備有如先前所对 之通訊系統’ #包含固線式連接至爪接收器/傳輸器8〇6之 音訊裝置34。在此實施例中,該通訊系統包含兩個職杉 器/傳輸H 8G6L及8G6R ’其均則地分難由線狐万 807R固線式連接至音訊裝置34,以便如本文中其它處先弟 所述自音訊裝置34接收數位訊號。將汛接收器/傳輸素 I06124.doc •69· 1335154 806L及806R大體上分別安裝於車輛800之左後座及右後座 之上方’以便分別發射相對窄聚焦之瓜訊號16L、16R以供 分別由坐在車輛800之左後座及右後座中之乘客所佩戴的 耳機接收器單元14(為便於論述,在圖24中標為ML、 個別接收。以此方式,每一耳機丨4L、丨411可分別接收個別 訊號16L' 16R。訊號16L' 16R可彼此相同,或可彼此不 同。因此,本實施例允許在複數個耳機及如先前所述配備 用以接收及/或傳輸諸如訊號16L、16R之無線訊號的其它 無線裝置當中進一步區分。 Λ號1 6L、1 6R可為單向的,或如圖示,當無線裝置配備 有無線接收器以及傳輸器時,其可為雙向的。在此實施例 中,可提供更簡易、更為成本有效之無線裝置,其將允許 每一耳機(或其它無線裝置)使用者與音訊裝置34個別通 訊。以此方 &lt;,可將音訊裝置34組態為提供各載運複數個 (例如四個)多工頻道之資料(諸如音訊及/或視訊資料)之多 個個別無線(例如IR)訊號,且因此向無線裝置使用者提供 甚^更多之選擇Q由每_接收器/傳輸器(例如ir接收器/傳 輸器806L、806R等)傳輸之個別無線訊號(例如,以訊號 见、!6R等)可經由音訊裝置34選擇,及/或或者由能夠將 無線裝置傳輸至其各舰接收器/傳輸器的每一雙向 裝置選擇。 了達成對無線訊號之所要窄聚焦’在無線訊號為则 ㈣之貫施例中’可㈣發光二極體提供於直接瞎準車輕 _之後座下方及朝向其⑽接收器/傳輸器中。 ’ 106l24.doc 1335154 進一步描述’使用具有相對小之實體尺寸之LED(諸如可與 80〇 yni寬及1000 ym高同樣小之SMD(表面安裝裝置)Led) 可為有利的。應瞭解’此等實施例簡化整體設計並亦使歸 因於LED之窄聚焦之不同訊號之間的交又干擾最小化。 或者,可進一步(例如)以更高速度來多工化經序列編碼 之數位位元流16,以便使顯著更大數量之可選頻道對於每 一使用者可用’例如用於飛機上。 儘管已參考傳輸數位訊號之系統而描述以上實施例,但 疋必須瞭解,纟X中所4之實施例可同等地應用於傳輸類 比机破之類比系統。因此,本文中所述之實施例可用以藉 由選擇待由其各個無線接收器/傳輸器傳輸之訊號而為類 比無線裝置(諸如耳機)之使用者提供對多個頻道之存取。 因此’此實施例可消除(對於類比系統及數㈣統兩者而 :)將多個頻道之資料完全多工化為單—訊號之需要,因 如耳機)之❹者可選擇待由位於該使用者 上方之各個無線接收器/傳輸器傳輸之個別頻道之資料(諸 如立體聲音吼、並想 )八獨立於且不同於相同車輛中之另一你 用者所接收之頻道之資料。 合=1::之實施:亦可用以提供類比與數位訊號之混 配備咬翻❹細可用1多個類比無線接收器/傳輸器來 ==車輛,輸來自諸如音訊裝置34之 之貝枓頻道以供類比無線裝 個數位益線接收3接收,且其亦可具有一或多 …踝接收窃/傳輸器,以 (或視訊,或其它)裝置之數位化自相同或額外音訊 化貝枓頻道以供數位無線裝 106i24.doc 1335154 置接收。如此配備之車輛可允許使用者具有對其中所使用 之無線裝置的更多種選擇。 在如本文中所述且在圖25中說明之一實施例中,將汛接 收器/傳輸器806(為#晰起見僅展示—個)安|於車_〇之 頂襯809内1其可見表面之後。如已知,車辅之頂襯在 車輛之頂部下方延伸,並連接至車輛之頂部。頂襯通常由 諸如聚苯乙烯發泡體或其它發泡體之柔軟材料8ιι形成, 且覆蓋m觀材料813(諸如布或紡織品或聚氯乙稀 (pvc))。在一可能之實施例中’—中空空間815可形成於 頂襯809内,以於其中良好地收納一 IR接收器/傳輸器 806。一狹長空間817亦可形成於頂襯内並自中空空間 延伸,以於其中容納電線807,且朝車輛之前方導引該電 線,音訊裝置34通常將位於該處。頂襯罩8丨3可有利地由 對於發射器/傳輸器所發射之無線訊號(例如,IR接收器/傳 輸器806所發射之IR訊號)透明之材料形成。或者,一開口 可形成於罩813中,以允許訊號穿過該處,且視情況,出 於保護及/或美觀原因,可將一第二透明罩819安裝於該開 口内及無線接收器/傳輸器上方。 現參看圖26,通訊系統Π40可包含電腦1142或其它臺式 或攜帶型單元,傳輸器18安裝於其上,並由可插入至一序 列或通用序列匯流排(USB)或其它習知埠中之電纜丨丨以連 接至其。傳輸器1 8將序列編碼數位位元流丨6傳輸至耳機μ 或諸如揚聲器1144及1146之電腦揚聲器,其每一者均可具 有適當解碼器及(視情況,(例如)如圖丨中所示之)開關選擇 106124.doc •72- 1335154 通訊系統1140自電腦1丨42提供電腦所產生之音訊輸出至 可選擇性地使用揚聲器U44及1146或耳機14之收聽者。傳 輸器18經由電纜1148自電腦1142接收一或多個頻道之數位 格式化音訊,或為了與一些電腦系統相容,傳輸器18可經 由電缓1148接收一或多個頻道之音訊格式化音訊,並用 DAC或如本文中上述之類似裝置將音訊轉換為數位訊號。 傳輸器1 8產生序列編碼數位位元流丨6,以供揚聲器丨丨44、 114 6及耳機14同時接收。 音量調節及控制旋鈕11 52表示手動調節,其可由旋紐 1 152所表示之資料輸入經由電腦做出或(如圖示)經由實體 旋鈕1152做出,及/或由定位於耳機14或一或多個電腦揚 聲器1144、1146上之旋鈕11 52做出。待經由旋鈕1152做出 之控制輸入之一可為選擇哪個聲音產生裝置(電腦揚聲器 1 144、1 146或耳機14)在任何時刻應為作用中的。通常希 望將電腦揚聲器1 144、I 146靜音,而經由耳機14接收音訊 以便使電細1142附近之周圍雜訊最小化。類似地,因為耳 機通常由電池供電,當不使用時,希望將耳機14靜音並關 閉至其之功率。此外,因為電腦揚聲器1144、1146未由電 纜連接至電腦1142,所以為了避免經由連接至標準交流功 率出口之轉化器來為電腦揚聲器1144、1146提供功率之需 要’為其提供電池功率可為便利的。 經由電腦1142上之資料輸入或旋知1152來選擇耳機戋揚 聲器可為最便利的。該選擇可由上述技術(諸如使用定位 I06124.doc •73- 1335154 於序列編碼數位位元流16内之程式碼)實施。現亦參看圖 12,一選擇揚聲器1144、1146,便可諸如” SpKRSn之程式 碼子組插入標頭8 7内之已知位置處,以指示該選擇。可將 耳機14内之接收器單元程式化為消除聲音再生,除非在該 已知位置處發現諸如&quot;HDFNS”之程式碼字組,而可將揚聲 器1144、1146程式化為若在該位置處未發現SpKRS則靜 音0 在一較佳實施例中,該程式碼字組之兩個複本可定位於 序列編碼數位位元流16内,以供比較。如上所述,藉由偵 測並比較兩個位置處之程式碼,可偵測並監控誤差事件。 在已在有限時間訊框内偵測並監控特定數量之誤差事件之 後靜曰功犯可操作,直至(且若)在規定時段内未偵測並 監控到誤差事件。 上文中揭示之自動關閉功能亦可用以 将足砰段内未 再生任何聲音時導致耳機14及/或揚㈣ιΐ44、&quot;Μ斷開立 電池功率。自動關閉功能可與誤差事件功能組合,以使得 在某-週期或長度之靜音週期中所監控之特定數量之誤差 事件可導致聲音冉A A t 生早兀*使其自身與電池功率斷開。亦可 使用類似刼作來提供與自A。壁出口應用至例如揚聲器 1144、1146之電功率斷開。 。現再次參看圖26,訊號輸入連接器⑴。可用以將優先訊 號應用於電腦&quot;42 ’該等優先訊號諸如陸上通訊線 =w)、行㈣話或⑽鈴聲或車道或庭院感測器輸出 曰不其可應用於序列編碼數位位元流16以供再生於耳 I06l24.doc •74- 1335154 機14及/或電腦揚聲器1丨44、1146上。此特徵類似於上文參 看圖19所述之優先頻道。應用於序列編碼數位位元流“之 資料可僅為指示應用於訊號輸入連接器丨丨5〇之訊號之一的 音調或鳴叫。該資料亦可表示預先程式化之訊息(諸如&quot;電 活正在響),或可表示(例如)自嬰兒房監控器接收之音 訊。可將再生之資料疊加於耳機14或揚聲器1144、1146所 再生之當前音訊上,或可疊加於當接收到此種資料時自動 選擇之獨立優先訊號上。 旋鈕1 1 52亦可用於執行於中心位置處之音量控制。舉例 而δ,當序列編碼數位位元流丨6中之所選程式碼自 改變為HDFNS時,由耳機14再生之音訊之音量可為不適當 的,即使其係揚聲器1144、1146所再生之音訊之音量。一 或多個旋鈕1152亦可(或或者)定位於電腦1152上、傳輸器 18上及揚聲器H44、1146之一或兩者上。 現參看圖27及諸如圖丨之本文中揭示之任何通訊系統實 =例,音訊資料源(諸如MP3播放器44,或數位相機或其它 資料源)之一或多個可為攜帶型裝置(諸如攜帶型m p 3播放 器45) ’其可由類似於位元流16之位元流無線連接至諸如 音訊裝置34之適當接收器,該接收器連接至主控制器⑽ 便經由位元流16傳輸至耳機14。 詳3之,通訊系統11 54可為雙向資料系統,其中組合 ^輪器/接收器i 9接收來自攜帶型Mp3播放器45之數位位 流17,其亦將位元流16傳輸至耳機14。接 應用於音訊裝置34並用以在位元流16中提供可選擇= 106l24.doc -75- 1335154 機Μ或適當揚聲器接收之一或多個音訊頻道。在此實施例 中,延程MP3播放器45可用於通訊系統1154之環境内,以 在耳機14上提供該等音訊頻道之一。 或者,攜帶型MP3播放器45上之傳輸器18可組態成以由 耳機14接收並直接解碼之形式提供位&amp;流^。纟此實施例 中’例如當已關閉馬達時在車輛中可使用攜帶型Mp3播放 器45來在系統1154之環境中提供音訊,而無需操作音訊裝 置或傳輸器/接收器1 9。在此實施例中,撝帶型Μ?]播放 器45與來自通訊系w刚之任何耳機14 一起使用而無需該 系統之其餘部分。 在另一替代實施例中,可組合兩個組態,以使得攜帶型 MP3播放器45可選擇性地用以直接提供音訊至耳機μ,或 經由包含於位元流16内之頻道提供音訊。在此組態中,可 提供另替代選擇,其中位元流17僅可經由耳機丨5解碼並 再生,其不必為回應位元流丨6。此組態可希望為使用耳機 1 5用於私人收聽提供機會,無論在系統11 内還是其它 處。在一變體中,此組態可不提供適用於耳機14直接接收 之位元流17,從而降低耳機14可自系統丨丨“之環境移除以 供其它處使用的可能性。 在另一實施例中,位元流17可記錄於與音訊裝置34相關 聯以供稍後播放之記憶體或硬碟中。 現已根據專利條例之要求描述本發明,熟習此項技術者 將瞭解如何對本文中揭示之發明做出改變及修改,以符合 其具體要求或條件。可在不脫離所揭示之發明之範脅及精 I06l24.doc -76, 1335154 神的情況下做出該等改變及修改。 現參看圖28,系統u 60之高階方塊圖說明RF接收器自動 開關1162在用於多個音訊輸入源之輸入(諸如音訊丨輸入 1164及音訊η輸入1166)與驅動LED光源1170之傳輸器驅動 器1168之間的使用。在正f操作t,_動開關ιΐ62將來 自源1164及1166(及其它,若存在)之音訊應用於傳輸器驅 動1168,其驅動LED 11 70傳輸載運關於由該等源產生之音 訊之資訊的光。光可由類比音訊訊號調變,或光可用數: 之音訊訊號表示編碼。將LED 117〇所產生之光應用於無線 接收器1172,其可為一對耳機。接收器1172包含頻道選擇 開關1174 ’其允許使用者選擇性地收聽該等音訊頻道之 ——» 〇 系統1160亦可包含連接至選擇性1117傳輸器1178之麥克風 1176 ’選擇性RF傳輸器1178包含可操作於第一位置(諸如 位置1182)中之選擇開關118〇,以將至行動電話或類似裝 置及來自行動電話或類似裝置之音訊應用於傳輸器驅動器 1168° 選擇開關118〇亦可在第二位置(諸如通告或傳呼位置 1184)中操作,以經由奸傳輸器1178將音訊應用於rf自動 開關1162。在正常操作中,將來自麥克風^%之音訊應用 於行動電話或類似裝置。當需要時,㈣28中所示,麥克 風使用者可將開關_操作至位置1184,以導致該音訊替 代來自音訊源(諸如源1164及1166)之音訊經由_收器自 動開關1162應用於傳輸器驅動器1168。在此操作模式中, I06l24.doc -77· 1335154 麥克風使用者可直接對耳機使用去 饵忧用者講話,以做出通告。 舉例而言,系統U60可用於車輛中 干种甲,其中一或多個乘客 正收聽其已自車輛中可用之音吨 9 源選擇之音訊頻道。車輛 司機可使用麥克風(諸如用於务描&gt; 3先扣仃動電話之内置麥克 風)’以在行動電話上講話或選楼 乂 &amp;擇性地對乘客做出通告而 無需要求乘客脫掉耳機。Hybrid system 1000 thus utilizes the ability of RF signals to propagate through the wall, but minimizes RF interference that can occur in such situations. System 1 is also highly flexible and allows multiple additional devices, such as PC 1060, to be connected to a wired network such as network 1020 without actually installing any additional cables or wiring in the building. Instead, a single interface encoder/decoder 〇4〇 needs to be installed in each room of the building, and the devices in any room so equipped can then be via a one-way decoder such as a decoder or such as The encoder/decoder. 1080 bidirectional encoder/decoder is connected to the network 1020. In this way, older buildings can be easily and cost effectively retrofitted into modern office buildings with the necessary network/communication capabilities. Referring now to Figure 24, an n vehicle 8 can be equipped with a communication system as previously described. # Include an audio device 34 that is fixedly coupled to the jaw receiver/transmitter 8〇6. In this embodiment, the communication system includes two jobs/transmissions H 8G6L and 8G6R 'they are all difficult to connect to the audio device 34 by the line fox 807R, so as to be the first brother in this article. The self-audio device 34 receives a digital signal. The 汛 receiver/transmitter I06124.doc • 69· 1335154 806L and 806R are installed substantially above the left rear seat and the right rear seat of the vehicle 800 respectively to respectively emit relatively narrow-focusing melon signals 16L, 16R for respectively The earphone receiver unit 14 worn by passengers sitting in the left rear seat and the right rear seat of the vehicle 800 (labeled ML in Figure 24 for individual discussion, individually received. In this way, each earphone 丨 4L, 丨411 may receive individual signals 16L' 16R, respectively. Signals 16L' 16R may be identical to each other or may be different from each other. Thus, the present embodiment allows for the provision of and/or transmission of signals such as signal 16L in a plurality of headphones and as previously described. Further distinguishing among other wireless devices of the 16R wireless signal. The nicknames 1 6L, 16R may be unidirectional, or as illustrated, when the wireless device is equipped with a wireless receiver and a transmitter, it may be bidirectional. In this embodiment, a simpler, more cost effective wireless device can be provided that will allow each headset (or other wireless device) user to communicate individually with the audio device 34. In this way, the audio device 3 can be 4 configured to provide a plurality of individual wireless (e.g., IR) signals for each of a plurality of (e.g., four) multiplexed channels of data (e.g., audio and/or video data), and thus provide wireless device users with The multiple selections Q of individual wireless signals transmitted by each receiver/transmitter (eg, ir receiver/transmitter 806L, 806R, etc.) (eg, by signal, !6R, etc.) may be selected via audio device 34, and / Or alternatively, each bidirectional device capable of transmitting the wireless device to its ship receiver/transmitter. Achieving a narrow focus on the wireless signal 'in the case of the wireless signal (4) The pole body is provided directly under the rear axle and behind the rear seat and towards its (10) receiver/transmitter. ' 106l24.doc 1335154 further describes 'using an LED with a relatively small physical size (such as can be wide with 80 〇 yni It may be advantageous to have a 1000 ym high SMD (Surface Mounted Device) Led. It should be understood that 'these embodiments simplify the overall design and also minimize interference and interference between different signals due to the narrow focus of the LED. Or The serially encoded digital bit stream 16 can be further multiplexed, for example, at a higher speed, such that a significantly larger number of selectable channels are available for each user 'eg, for use on an aircraft. The above embodiments are described in terms of a system for transmitting digital signals, but it must be understood that the embodiment of 纟X 4 can equally be applied to a transmission analogy system. Therefore, the embodiments described herein can be used to Selecting the signals to be transmitted by their respective wireless receivers/transmitters to provide access to multiple channels for users of analog wireless devices, such as headsets. Thus this embodiment can be eliminated (for analog systems and numbers) Both:) fully multiplexing the data of multiple channels into a single-signal requirement, such as a headset, the individual channel to be transmitted by each wireless receiver/transmitter located above the user. The data (such as stereo sound, and think) eight is independent of and different from the information of the channel received by another user in the same vehicle. Combination = 1:: Implementation: It can also be used to provide analogy and digital signal mixing. It can be used with more than one analog wireless receiver/transmitter == vehicle, which is transmitted from a channel such as audio device 34. For analog wireless to receive a digital receive line 3 receive, and it can also have one or more ... receive theft / transmitter, (or video, or other) device digitized from the same or additional audio channel Received for digital wireless installation 106i24.doc 1335154. A vehicle so equipped can allow the user to have more choices for the wireless device used therein. In one embodiment as described herein and illustrated in FIG. 25, the 汛 receiver/transmitter 806 (shown only for the sake of clarity) is placed in the top 809 of the car _ 1 1 After the visible surface. As is known, the car top lining extends below the top of the vehicle and is attached to the top of the vehicle. The top liner is typically formed from a soft material such as polystyrene foam or other foam, and is covered with a m-view material 813 (such as cloth or textile or polyvinyl chloride (pvc)). In a possible embodiment, a hollow space 815 can be formed in the top liner 809 to accommodate an IR receiver/transmitter 806 therein. A narrow space 817 can also be formed in the top liner and extend from the hollow space to receive the electrical wires 807 therein and direct the electrical wires toward the front of the vehicle, where the audio device 34 will typically be located. The top lining 8 丨 3 may advantageously be formed from a material that is transparent to the wireless signal transmitted by the transmitter/transmitter (e.g., the IR signal emitted by the IR receiver/transmitter 806). Alternatively, an opening may be formed in the cover 813 to allow the signal to pass therethrough and, as appropriate, a second transparent cover 819 may be mounted within the opening and the wireless receiver for protection and/or aesthetic reasons. Above the transmitter. Referring now to Figure 26, the communication system 40 can include a computer 1142 or other desktop or portable unit to which the transmitter 18 is mounted and can be inserted into a serial or universal serial bus (USB) or other conventional device. The cable is connected to it. Transmitter 18 transmits sequence encoded bit stream stream 6 to headphones μ or computer speakers such as speakers 1144 and 1146, each of which may have a suitable decoder and (as appropriate, for example, as shown in FIG. The switch selects 106124.doc • 72-1335154 The communication system 1140 provides the audio output generated by the computer from the computer 1丨42 to the listener who can selectively use the speakers U44 and 1146 or the earphone 14. Transmitter 18 receives digitally formatted audio for one or more channels from computer 1142 via cable 1148, or for compatibility with some computer systems, transmitter 18 can receive audio formatted audio for one or more channels via electrical delay 1148. The audio is converted to a digital signal using a DAC or similar device as described herein. Transmitter 18 produces a sequence coded bit stream stream 6 for simultaneous reception by speakers 丨丨 44, 114 6 and headphone 14. The volume adjustment and control knob 11 52 represents a manual adjustment that can be made via a computer or (as illustrated) via a physical knob 1152 by a data input represented by the knob 1 152 and/or by positioning to the earphone 14 or one or The knobs 11 52 on the plurality of computer speakers 1144, 1146 are made. One of the control inputs to be made via knob 1152 can be active at any time for selecting which sound producing device (computer speaker 1 144, 1 146 or earphone 14). It is generally desirable to mute the computer speakers 1 144, I 146 and receive audio via the headphones 14 to minimize ambient noise near the electrical thin 1142. Similarly, because the headset is typically powered by a battery, it is desirable to mute the headset 14 and turn it off when not in use. Moreover, because the computer speakers 1144, 1146 are not connected to the computer 1142 by cables, it may be convenient to provide battery power for the computer speakers 1144, 1146 to avoid power via a converter connected to a standard AC power outlet. . It is most convenient to select the earphones via the data input or the so-called 1152 on the computer 1142. This selection can be implemented by the techniques described above, such as using the code in the sequence encoding digital bit stream 16 using the location I06124.doc • 73-1335154. Referring now also to Figure 12, a selector speaker 1144, 1146 can be inserted into a known location within the header 87 such as "SpKRSn" to indicate the selection. The receiver unit in the headset 14 can be programmed. To eliminate sound reproduction, unless a codeword such as &quot;HDFNS&quot; is found at the known location, the speakers 1144, 1146 can be programmed to mute 0 if no SpKRS is found at that location. In an embodiment, two copies of the codeword block can be located within the sequence coded bit stream 16 for comparison. As described above, error events can be detected and monitored by detecting and comparing the code at two locations. After a certain number of error events have been detected and monitored within a limited time frame, the quiet clerk is operational until (and if) an error event is not detected and monitored for a specified period of time. The auto-shutdown function disclosed above can also be used to cause the headphone 14 and/or the speaker (4) ιΐ44, &quot; Μ to disconnect the battery power when no sound is reproduced in the foot. The auto-shutdown function can be combined with the error event function so that a certain number of error events monitored during a certain period or period of silence periods can cause the sound 冉A A t to be early* to disconnect itself from the battery power. Similar works can also be used to provide and self-A. The wall outlet is applied to, for example, the electrical power of the speakers 1144, 1146 is broken. . Referring now again to Figure 26, the signal input connector (1). Can be used to apply priority signals to computers &quot;42' such priority signals such as landline = w), line (4) words or (10) ringtones or lane or garden sensor outputs are not applicable to sequence coded bit stream 16 for reproduction on the ear I06l24.doc • 74- 1335154 machine 14 and / or computer speakers 1 丨 44, 1146. This feature is similar to the priority channel described above with reference to Figure 19. The data applied to the sequence-encoded digital bit stream may be merely a tone or a tweet indicating one of the signals applied to the signal input connector. The data may also represent pre-programmed messages (such as &quot; Is ringing, or may indicate, for example, audio received from the baby room monitor. The reproduced data may be superimposed on the current audio reproduced by the earphone 14 or the speakers 1144, 1146, or may be superimposed upon receiving such information. The independent priority signal is automatically selected. Knob 1 1 52 can also be used to perform volume control at the center position. For example, δ, when the selected code in the sequence coded bit stream stream 6 is changed to HDFNS, The volume of the audio reproduced by the earphone 14 may be inappropriate, even if it is the volume of the audio reproduced by the speakers 1144, 1146. One or more knobs 1152 may also be (or are) positioned on the computer 1152, on the transmitter 18. And one or both of the speakers H44, 1146. Referring now to Figure 27 and any communication system such as that disclosed herein, an audio data source (such as an MP3 player 44, or a digital device) One or more of the machine or other data source may be a portable device (such as a portable mp3 player 45) 'which may be wirelessly connected to a suitable receiver, such as audio device 34, by a bit stream similar to bit stream 16 The receiver is connected to the main controller (10) and transmitted to the earphone 14 via the bit stream 16. In detail, the communication system 11 54 can be a bidirectional data system, wherein the combination wheel/receiver i 9 receives from the portable Mp3 The bit stream stream 17 of the player 45, which also transmits the bit stream 16 to the headphone 14. It is applied to the audio device 34 and used to provide selectable in the bit stream 16 = 106l24.doc -75 - 1335154 The speaker receives one or more audio channels. In this embodiment, the extended-range MP3 player 45 can be used in the environment of the communication system 1154 to provide one of the audio channels on the headset 14. Or, portable MP3 playback The transmitter 18 on the unit 45 can be configured to provide a bit &amp; stream in the form received and directly decoded by the headset 14. In this embodiment, a portable Mp3 player can be used in the vehicle, for example, when the motor has been turned off. 45 to mention in the environment of system 1154 For audio, without the need to operate an audio device or transmitter/receiver 19. In this embodiment, the cassette player 45 is used with any headset 14 from the communication system w without the rest of the system. In another alternate embodiment, two configurations may be combined such that the portable MP3 player 45 is selectively operable to provide audio directly to the headset μ or via a channel included in the bitstream 16 Audio. In this configuration, an alternative is provided, in which the bit stream 17 can only be decoded and reproduced via the headset 丨5, which does not have to be a response bit stream 6. This configuration may be desirable for use with the headset 1 5 Provide opportunities for private listening, whether in system 11 or elsewhere. In a variant, this configuration may not provide a bit stream 17 suitable for direct reception by the earphone 14, thereby reducing the likelihood that the earphone 14 may be removed from the environment of the system for use elsewhere. In another implementation In the example, the bit stream 17 can be recorded in a memory or hard disk associated with the audio device 34 for later playback. The present invention has been described in accordance with the requirements of the patent regulations, and those skilled in the art will understand how to The invention disclosed herein is subject to change and modifications in accordance with the specific requirements or conditions of the invention. The changes and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the invention as disclosed and claimed. Referring now to Figure 28, a high level block diagram of system u 60 illustrates an RF receiver automatic switch 1162 for input to multiple audio input sources (such as audio input 1164 and audio η input 1166) and a driver driver for driving LED source 1170. Use between 1168. In the positive f operation t, the _ switch ι 62 applies the audio from the sources 1164 and 1166 (and others, if any) to the transmitter drive 1168, which drives the LEDs 11 70 to carry the carrier on the source The light of the information of the raw audio. The light can be modulated by the analog audio signal, or the optical usable number: the audio signal indicates the encoding. The light generated by the LED 117 应用于 is applied to the wireless receiver 1172, which can be a pair of headphones. The switch 1172 includes a channel selection switch 1174' that allows the user to selectively listen to the audio channels -» The system 1160 can also include a microphone 1176 connected to the selective 1117 transmitter 1178. The selective RF transmitter 1178 includes A selector switch 118A operating in a first location (such as location 1182) to apply audio to a mobile phone or similar device and from a mobile phone or the like to the transmitter driver 1168° select switch 118, or second A location (such as an announcement or paging location 1184) operates to apply audio to the rf automatic switch 1162 via the transmitter 1178. In normal operation, audio from the microphone is applied to a mobile phone or similar device. (4) 28, the microphone user can operate the switch _ to position 1184 to cause the audio to be replaced by an audio source (such as source 1164). And the audio of 1166) is applied to the transmitter driver 1168 via the _receiver automatic switch 1162. In this mode of operation, the microphone user can directly use the bait to talk to the earphones to make For example, the system U60 can be used in a vehicle in which the one or more passengers are listening to an audio channel that has been selected from the source 9 of the vehicle available. The vehicle driver can use the microphone (such as for the service) "Beginning with the built-in microphone of the phone") "Speak on the mobile phone or choose the building" to advertise the passengers selectively without having to ask the passenger to take off the headset.

RF傳輸器1178正常可處於關閉條件中,其中來自音訊1 1164及音訊n 1166之音訊組合於傳輸器驅動器“μ中,其 作為訊號處理器操作以提供由LED 117〇提供之無線訊號: 序列數位位元流調變,其可為光傳輸器或以其它頻率操作 之傳輸器。由LED 117G傳輸之數位訊號呈序列位元流格式 並由-或多個接收器1172接收。正常操作之本機設定選擇 開關H74可用以手動選擇—或多個音訊輸入,例如單聲音 訊輸入或形成立體聲輸入之一對輸入。 在開啟條件中,可操作心傳輸器1178,以使得在開關位 ^ 1184中,可經由傳輸器驅動器1168將來自麥克風“Μ之 音訊應用於複數個接收器1172之每一者所提供之所有音訊 頻道1至η。結果,飛機飛行員或巴士司機或類似之主操作 者可將開關11 8 0操作至開關位置!} 8 2中並做出供應給接收 克1172之所有音訊頻道之通告。接收器ιΐ72可為複數個耳 機或其匕聲音產生裝置。收聽所選接收器1172之一的每一 人將因此聽到飛行員或其它通告而無需考慮接收器開關 1 1 74選擇哪個音訊頻道。 或者,可將來自麥克風1176之音訊應用於該等音訊頻道 106124.doc 78 · 1335154 之一預選子組(甚至僅單一頻道),且包含於LED 1170所傳 輸之訊號内的控制訊號將導致接收器i 172選擇預定音訊頻 道,以使得將用麥克風丨176做出之通告提供至所有收聽 者。 此外’音訊(諸如預錄訊息)之其它源可經由射頻傳輸器 1178應用於接收器開關H62(替代麥克風1176或除了麥克 風1176以外)’以使得可對所有收聽者做出此等預錄通告 而無需考慮可由每一接收器1172之使用者做出的音訊頻道 選擇。或者’可將此等預錄訊息或來自另一源之音訊直接 提供至無RF連接之接收器開關1162。一些接收器1172可由 不必聽到預錄通告之使用者使用。在此等情況下,控制訊 號可用以選擇預定頻道,在該頻道上,僅在接收器丨172之 一子組中且不在其它子組中做出通告。 用於允許飛行員或司機做出優先於正常選擇之音訊頻道 上所提供之音訊的通告之開關位置1184可被認為是主設 疋因為其影響可由接收器1172之操作者或使用者選擇之 所有頻道上或頻道之至少一子組上的音訊。主音量設定 1 1 85亦可用作主設定。接收器丨〖72可便利地包含對每一接 收裔特殊之音量設定,諸如本機音量調節設定1186,希望 其由接收器11 7.2之操作者使用且為了該操作者之利益而使 用然而,在許多情形中,主音量設定可提供額外益處。 主3里设定1185可提供對所有接收器1172或接收器11 72 之個或一子組的最小、最大或當前音量設定之控制,從 而藉由導致用該等設定影響關於接收器之所選一者或一組 I06l24.doc -79· 1335154 之控制碼而更動來自便利位置之本機所選音量設定丨186。 舉例而言,當接收器1172用於家庭或群體情形中時,主 音里设夂1185可用以經由傳輸器驅動器1168將控制訊號發 送至所有接收器1172、接收器1172之一所選子組或每一獨 立接收器1172,以便為了限制來自一或多個具體接收器 U 72之最大可用音量而更動本機音量設定丨丨%。以此方 式,父母可選擇將佩戴耳機之孩子可用來聽音樂之最大音 量限制為安全位準,以保護孩子之聽力。類似地,當接收 器1172為可由不同人使用之耳機時,主音量設定ιΐ85可用 以保護隨後使用者不受前一使用者所選之高本機設定的影 響。主音量設定11 85亦可以通告開關位置丨丨84之方式使 用,以降低一或多個接收器1172所提供之音訊之音量,以 使接收器1172之使用者聽到另一系統所提供之通告音訊。 頒似地,舉例而言,在飛機上及在類似環境GetHng) 中,一些乘客可選擇非常低之音量設定,以允許其在聽音 樂之同時入睡》偶爾可需要允許飛行員更動此等設定,以 吏ί于[7使特疋接收器11 7 2設定為低音量位準仍可聽到重要 通口。更一般地,飛機中及類似環境中之乘客可使用本機 音置設定1186替代關閉開關來關閉接收器U72。週期性 地,或許在每一飛行前,有利之舉可係使用主音量設定 11 8S或其—自動子組來將每一接收器丨172中之每一本機音 疋Π 8 6重a又為舒適之最小設定,以使得下一使用者當 第的戴上耳機或另一接收器11 72時將至少聽到最小音量 之所選音訊。 106124.doc •80· 丄 =疋⑽亦可用以控制接收器u72之所選接收器 頻道之什ΛΤ對應於對允許所選使用者收聽所選音訊 1有! 因°舉例而f,可將耳機接收器提供 ㈣乘客,但是由司機⑽傳輪之㈣訊號可阻斷所選The RF transmitter 1178 can normally be in a shutdown condition in which the audio from the audio 1 1164 and the audio n 1166 is combined in the transmitter driver "μ, which operates as a signal processor to provide the wireless signal provided by the LED 117: sequence digits The bit stream is modulated, which can be an optical transmitter or a transmitter operating at other frequencies. The digital signals transmitted by the LED 117G are in a sequential bit stream format and are received by - or a plurality of receivers 1172. Normal operation of the local The setting selection switch H74 can be used to manually select - or a plurality of audio inputs, such as a single voice input or a pair of stereo input inputs. In the on condition, the heart transmitter 1178 can be operated such that in the switch position ^ 1184, The audio from the microphone can be applied to all of the audio channels 1 through n provided by each of the plurality of receivers 1172 via the transmitter driver 1168. As a result, the pilot or bus driver or similar main operator can operate the switch 1180 to the switch position! } 8 2 and make an announcement to all audio channels that receive the credit 1172. The receiver ι 72 can be a plurality of headphones or its chirp sound generating device. Each person listening to one of the selected receivers 1172 will therefore hear the pilot or other announcement without having to consider which audio channel the receiver switch 1 1 74 selects. Alternatively, the audio from the microphone 1176 can be applied to one of the pre-selected sub-groups of the audio channels 106124.doc 78 · 1335154 (even a single channel only), and the control signals contained in the signals transmitted by the LEDs 1170 will cause the receiver i 172 selects a predetermined audio channel such that an announcement made with microphone 176 is provided to all listeners. In addition, other sources of audio (such as pre-recorded messages) may be applied to the receiver switch H62 (instead of or in addition to the microphone 1176) via the RF transmitter 1178 to enable such pre-recorded announcements for all listeners. There is no need to consider the audio channel selection that can be made by the user of each receiver 1172. Alternatively, the pre-recorded messages or audio from another source may be provided directly to the receiver switch 1162 without the RF connection. Some receivers 1172 can be used by users who do not have to hear pre-recorded announcements. In such cases, the control signal can be used to select a predetermined channel on which the announcement is made only in one of the receivers 172 and not in the other subgroups. The switch position 1184 for allowing the pilot or driver to make an announcement over the audio provided on the normally selected audio channel can be considered a primary setting because all of the channels can be selected by the operator or user of the receiver 1172. Audio on at least a subset of the channel or channel. Master volume setting 1 1 85 can also be used as the main setting. Receiver 丨 72 may conveniently include a volume setting specific to each recipient, such as local volume adjustment setting 1186, which is intended to be used by the operator of receiver 11 7.2 and used for the benefit of the operator, however, In many cases, the master volume setting provides additional benefits. The main 3 setting 1185 provides control of the minimum, maximum or current volume settings for all or a subset of all receivers 1172 or receivers 11 72, thereby causing selection of the receiver with respect to the selection of the receiver. The control code of I06l24.doc -79· 1335154 is used to change the selected volume setting 丨186 from the convenient location. For example, when the receiver 1172 is used in a home or group situation, the tone set 夂 1185 can be used to transmit control signals via the transmitter driver 1168 to all of the receivers 1172, one of the selected subsets of the receivers 1172 or each A separate receiver 1172 is provided to change the local volume setting 丨丨% in order to limit the maximum available volume from one or more of the particular receivers U 72. In this way, parents can choose to limit the maximum volume of music that can be used by children wearing headphones to a safe level to protect their hearing. Similarly, when the receiver 1172 is a headset that can be used by different people, the master volume setting ι ΐ 85 can be used to protect subsequent users from the high local settings selected by the previous user. The master volume setting 11 85 can also be used to notify the switch position 丨丨 84 to reduce the volume of the audio provided by the one or more receivers 1172 so that the user of the receiver 1172 can hear the announcement audio provided by another system. . As an example, for example, on an airplane and in a similar environment (GetHng), some passengers can choose a very low volume setting to allow them to fall asleep while listening to music. Occasionally, the pilot may need to be allowed to change the settings to吏ί[7] The special receiver can still be heard by setting the special receiver 11 7 2 to the low volume level. More generally, passengers in aircraft and similar environments can use the local tone setting 1186 instead of the close switch to turn off the receiver U72. Periodically, perhaps before each flight, it may be advantageous to use the master volume setting 11 8S or its automatic subgroup to assign each of the receivers 172 to a weight of 8 6 a. The minimum setting for comfort is such that the next user will hear at least the selected volume of the minimum volume when wearing the headset or another receiver 11 72. 106124.doc •80· 丄=疋(10) can also be used to control the selected receiver channel of the receiver u72. It corresponds to allowing the selected user to listen to the selected audio 1! Because of the example f, the headset can be used. The receiver provides (4) passengers, but the (4) signal transmitted by the driver (10) can block the selected

:::以對應於需要付費才能收聽之電影或其它頻道。女 其它收f者一收到付費便可接著使用主音量設定 為特定使用者接通電影頻道。類似地,主音量設定 =1用於諸如電影院之環境中以供語言翻譯,或其可用 =物館環境中以供音訊嚮導限制對所選頻道之存取之持 -·貝日間,以對應於適當付費或其它許准機制。 【圖式簡單說明】 圖1為無線耳機系統之方塊圖。 圖2為使㈣比訊號組合組態之無線耳機系統1()之方塊 圖。 圖3為用於無線耳機系統(諸如圖1及圖2中所述之無線耳 機系統1G)中之資料流格式之—實施例的方塊圖。 圖4為圖解說明接收器或耳機單元(諸如圖丨中所述之耳 機接收器單元1 4)之一實施例之方塊圖。 圖5包含用於系統10中之多頻道耳機之一實施例的俯視 圖及正視圖。 圖6描述傳輸器裝置500的功能性方塊圖。 圖7描述圖6之傳輸器裝置5〇〇之編碼器的硬體方塊 圖0 圖8為傳輸器裝置5〇〇之時脈及時脈定相電路628之功能 I06l24.doc -81 - 1335154 性方塊圖 能性 方二為傳輪器裝請之輸入音訊轉換模组切之功 圖 圖為傳輸H裝置之IR模組發射器634之功能性方塊 入緩 圖:摇述與傳輸器裝置5。。一起使用之傳輸資料輸 衝态之組態。 圖12描述可與傳輸器裝置500 — 機制。 起使用之數位資料傳輸 器裝置一起使用 圖。 圖14為接收器裝置70〇之初級接收器702之功 能性方塊 圖B為接收器裝置70〇UR接收器714之功能性方塊圖。 圖6為接收裔裝置7〇〇之資料時脈恢復電路η 6之功能性 方塊圖。 大器模組722之功 圖π為接收器裂置7〇〇之DAc及音訊放 能性方塊圖。 收器704之功能性方塊 圖18為接收器裝置7〇〇之二級 圖。 圖19為配備通訊系± 糸、,先8 0 1之車輛8 〇 〇之圖。 圖2 0為配備通訊系Λ, 糸.,先801之另一車輛800之圖’其具有優 於圖19中所示 &lt;車_ 平稱8 〇 〇之額外特徵。 l06124.doc -82· 1335154 圖2 1為配備通訊系統90 1之車輛900之圖β 圖22為配備無線通§fl(糸統991之車輛988之圖;及 圖2 3為配備無線通訊系統1 〇 〇 〇之建築物1 〇 1 〇之圖。 圖24為一替代組態之示意圖,在該替代組態中,獨立之 無線接收器/傳輸器獨立地與可包含傳輸器之獨立耳機接 收器通訊。 圖25為另一實施例之示意圖,在該實施例中,一或多個 無線接收器/傳輸器可定位於對無線系統中所使用之輻射 透明之車輛頂襯(headliner)之後方。 圖26為無線電腦揚聲器或耳機系統之圖。 圖27為為包含攜帶型音訊源之無線音訊分配系統之圖。 圖2 8為一替代組態之方塊圖,在該替代組態中,將一 接收器插入多個音訊源之間,以導致在無線耳機上播放自 RF源接收之音訊,且可使用主音量設定來更動所選接收器 中之本機音量設定。 【主要元件符號說明】 1L 頻道 2L 頻道 2R 頻道 3L 頻道 3R 頻道 4L 頻道 4R 頻道 10 無線耳機系統 I06l24.doc -83- 1335154 12 傳輸器子系統 13 傳輸器子系統 14 耳機接收器單元 16 紅外線(IR)或射頻(RF)訊號 17 位元流 18 IR傳輸器部分 19 傳輸器/接收器 20 發光二極體 22 IR傳輸器驅動器 24 數位訊號處理器編碼器及控制器 26 主控制器 27 數位訊號處理器編碼器及控制器 28 數位訊號處理器編碼器及控制器 30 數位訊號處理器編碼器及控制器 32 訊號組合器/多工器 34 音訊裝置 36 音訊級 38 線1源 40 線2源 42 立體聲頻道電路 44 MP3播放器 45 攜帶型MP3播放器 46 音訊級 48 線3源 I06124.doc -84- 1335154::: To correspond to a movie or other channel that you need to pay to listen to. Females who receive the payment can then use the master volume setting to connect to the movie channel for a specific user. Similarly, the master volume setting = 1 is used in an environment such as a movie theater for language translation, or it is available in the library environment for the audio guide to restrict access to the selected channel - Appropriate payment or other permitting mechanism. [Simple diagram of the diagram] Figure 1 is a block diagram of the wireless headset system. Fig. 2 is a block diagram of a wireless earphone system 1() in which (4) is combined with a signal. 3 is a block diagram of an embodiment of a data stream format for use in a wireless headset system, such as the wireless headset system 1G described in FIGS. 1 and 2. 4 is a block diagram illustrating one embodiment of a receiver or earphone unit, such as the earphone receiver unit 14 described in FIG. FIG. 5 includes a top view and a front view of one embodiment of a multi-channel headset for use in system 10. FIG. 6 depicts a functional block diagram of the transmitter device 500. Figure 7 depicts the hardware block diagram of the encoder of the transmitter device 5 of Figure 6 Figure 8 Figure 8 shows the function of the clock and pulse phase phasing circuit 628 of the transmitter device 5 I06l24.doc -81 - 1335154 Figure 2 is the functional input diagram of the input audio conversion module of the transmission device. The functional block diagram of the IR module transmitter 634 for transmitting the H device: the jog and the transmitter device 5. . The configuration of the transmission data input used together. Figure 12 depicts a mechanism that can be used with the transmitter device 500. Use the digital data transmitter device together. Figure 14 is a functional block diagram of the primary receiver 702 of the receiver device 70. Figure B is a functional block diagram of the receiver device 70 〇 UR receiver 714. Figure 6 is a functional block diagram of the data recovery circuit η 6 of the data receiving device. The power of the large module 722 is shown as a DAc of the receiver split 7 and an audio discharge block diagram. Functional Block of Receiver 704 Figure 18 is a secondary diagram of receiver device 7A. Fig. 19 is a diagram of a vehicle 8 〇 配备 equipped with a communication system ± 糸, first 802. Figure 20 is a diagram of another vehicle 800 equipped with a communication system, 糸., 801, which has additional features superior to the &lt;car_level 8 〇 所示 shown in Figure 19. L06124.doc -82· 1335154 Figure 2 1 is a diagram of a vehicle 900 equipped with a communication system 90 1 Figure 22 is a diagram of a vehicle equipped with a wireless pass §fl (the vehicle 988 of the system 991; and Figure 2 3 is equipped with a wireless communication system 1 Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of an alternative configuration in which a separate wireless receiver/transmitter is independently associated with a separate earphone receiver that can include a transmitter Communication Figure 25. is a schematic diagram of another embodiment in which one or more wireless receivers/transmitters can be positioned behind a vehicle headliner that is transparent to radiation used in a wireless system. Figure 26 is a diagram of a wireless computer speaker or headphone system. Figure 27 is a diagram of a wireless audio distribution system including a portable audio source. Figure 28 is a block diagram of an alternative configuration in which an The receiver is inserted between a plurality of audio sources to cause the audio received from the RF source to be played on the wireless earphone, and the master volume setting can be used to change the local volume setting in the selected receiver. [Main component symbol description] 1L Channel 2L channel 2R channel 3L channel 3R channel 4L channel 4R channel 10 wireless headset system I06l24.doc -83- 1335154 12 transmitter subsystem 13 transmitter subsystem 14 headphone receiver unit 16 infrared (IR) or radio frequency (RF) signal 17 bits Stream 18 IR Transmitter Section 19 Transmitter/Receiver 20 LED Diode 22 IR Transmitter Driver 24 Digital Signal Processor Encoder and Controller 26 Host Controller 27 Digital Signal Processor Encoder and Controller 28 Digital Signal Processing Encoder and Controller 30 Digital Signal Processor Encoder and Controller 32 Signal Combiner/Multiplexer 34 Audio Device 36 Audio Level 38 Line 1 Source 40 Line 2 Source 42 Stereo Channel Circuit 44 MP3 Player 45 Portable MP3 Player 46 audio level 48 line 3 source I06124.doc -84- 1335154

50 線4源 52 立體聲頻道電路 54 新單元附加裝置 56 線5源 58 線6源 60 立體聲頻道電路 62 舊型配接器 64 類比音訊輸入線7 66 類比音訊輸入線8 68 立體聲頻道電路 70 IR接收器 72 IR接收訊號處理器 74 解碼器 76 數位訊號處理器 78 開關選擇器 80 耳機 81 左耳揚聲器 82 功率控制訊號 83 右耳揚聲器 84 電池系統 86 傳輸訊號/封包 87 標頭部分 88 資料部分 89 字組 I06124.doc -85 - 1335154 90 空間 91 字組 92 預定程式碼/唯一識別碼 93 資料偏移值 94 偏移部分 95 資料區塊 96 控制區塊 97 資料填充符部分 98 校正部分/末端區塊/端子區塊 99 標尾 100 間隙 101 校正部分 102 控制碼部分 103 字組 104 字組 106 程式碼偵測器 108 延遲計數器 110 中斷開關 112 同步偵測器 114 鎖相迴路電路 116 可重寫記憶體 1 18 多頻道耳機 120 左耳機糸統 122 右耳機糸統 I06l24.doc ·86· 133515450 line 4 source 52 stereo channel circuit 54 new unit add-on 56 line 5 source 58 line 6 source 60 stereo channel circuit 62 legacy adapter 64 analog audio input line 7 66 analog audio input line 8 68 stereo channel circuit 70 IR reception 72 IR Receive Signal Processor 74 Decoder 76 Digital Signal Processor 78 Switch Selector 80 Headphone 81 Left Ear Speaker 82 Power Control Signal 83 Right Ear Speaker 84 Battery System 86 Transmit Signal/Packet 87 Header Section 88 Data Section 89 Words Group I06124.doc -85 - 1335154 90 Space 91 block 92 Pre-program code/unique identification code 93 Data offset value 94 Offset part 95 Data block 96 Control block 97 Data filler part 98 Correction part/end block /terminal block 99 tail 100 gap 101 correction part 102 control code part 103 block 104 block 106 code detector 108 delay counter 110 interrupt switch 112 synchronous detector 114 phase-locked loop circuit 116 rewritable memory 1 18 multi-channel headphones 120 left earphones 122 right earphones I06l24.doc ·86· 1 335154

124 頭帶 126 前方揚聲器 128 中央揚聲器 130 後方揚聲器 132 有效孔 134 有效音訊路徑 500 音訊傳輸裝置 600 數位訊號處理器 602 數位化音訊輸入流 603 數位化音訊輸入流 604 數位化音訊輸入流 605 數位化音訊輸入流 606 多工器 608 多工器 610 訊號 612 訊號 613 序列埠 614 直接記憶體存取緩衝器 615 序列埠 616 直接記憶體存取緩衝器 618 類比數位轉換器 619 類比數位轉換器 620 類比數位轉換器 621 類比數位轉換器 106124.doc ·87· 1335154 622 輸入音訊轉換模組 623 音訊模組 624 音訊模組 625 音訊模組 626 編碼 628 時脈定相調整電路 630 啟動/程式記憶體 63 1 線驅動器 632 電源 633 恆定數位資料流 634 IR傳輸器模組 638 訊號 639 訊號 640 直流偏壓電路 641 輸入 &gt;勇浪保護電路 642 低通滤波器 643 類比數位轉換器 650 IR驅動電路 65 1 紅外線驅動器、偏壓及控制 652 發射器 660 主時脈 661 序列時脈 662 左/右時脈 663 多工器時脈 I06l24.doc -88- 1335154 666 時脈緩衝器 667 時脈除法器 668 時脈定相電路 670 保持緩衝器 671 保持緩衝器 672 保持緩衝器 673 保持緩衝器 700 接收器裝置或耳機單元 701 IR訊號 702 初級接收器 704 二級接收器 710 數位訊號處理器 711 序列埠 712 IR資料流 713 序列埠傳輸器 714 IR接收器/自動增益控制電路 716 資料時脈恢復電路 718 使用者可選開關及指示器控i 719 外部開關及指示器 720 IR資料輸入 721 數位化資料流 722 數位類比轉換器及音訊放大: 724 類比訊號 730 啟動/程式記憶體 電路 電路 I06124.doc 89- 1335154 740 電源及電壓監管器電路 750 耳機前置放大器 759 電源 760 開關式電源 761 DC功率 762 開/關開關 770 IR前置放大器 771 最終放大器 772 資料矯方級 773 自動增益控制電路 774 前置放大增益/偏壓訊號 775 邊緣偵測器 776 晶體振盪器 777 反相器/緩衝器 778 緩衝器 780 類比數位轉換器 781 低通濾·波器 782 音訊放大器 800 車輛 801 通訊系統 802 電源系統 803 DVD播放器 804 配線裝置 805 無線通訊裝置 106124.doc -90- 1335154124 headband 126 front speaker 128 center speaker 130 rear speaker 132 effective aperture 134 effective audio path 500 audio transmission device 600 digital signal processor 602 digital audio input stream 603 digital audio input stream 604 digital audio input stream 605 digital audio Input Stream 606 Multiplexer 608 Multiplexer 610 Signal 612 Signal 613 Sequence 614 Direct Memory Access Buffer 615 Sequence 埠 616 Direct Memory Access Buffer 618 Analog Digit Converter 619 Analog Digit Converter 620 Analog Digit Conversion 621 analog digital converter 106124.doc ·87· 1335154 622 input audio conversion module 623 audio module 624 audio module 625 audio module 626 code 628 clock phasing adjustment circuit 630 start / program memory 63 1 line driver 632 Power Supply 633 Constant Digital Data Stream 634 IR Transmitter Module 638 Signal 639 Signal 640 DC Bias Circuit 641 Input > Yong Wave Protection Circuit 642 Low Pass Filter 643 Analog Digital Converter 650 IR Driver Circuit 65 1 Infrared Driver, Bias and control 652 Transmitter 660 Main clock 661 Sequence clock 662 Left/Right clock 663 multiplexer clock I06l24.doc -88- 1335154 666 Clock buffer 667 Clock divider 668 Clock phasing circuit 670 Hold buffer 671 Hold buffer 672 Hold buffer 673 Hold buffer 700 Receiver device or headphone unit 701 IR signal 702 Primary receiver 704 Secondary receiver 710 Digital signal processor 711 Sequence 712 IR data stream 713 Sequence 埠 Transmitter 714 IR Receiver/Automatic Gain Control Circuitry 716 Data Clock Recovery Circuitry 718 User-Selectable Switch and Indicator Control i 719 External Switch and Indicator 720 IR Data Input 721 Digital Data Stream 722 Digital Analog Converter and Audio Amplifier: 724 Analog Signal 730 Startup / Program Memory Circuitry I06124.doc 89- 1335154 740 Power and Voltage Supervisor Circuitry 750 Headphone Preamplifier 759 Power Supply 760 Switching Power Supply 761 DC Power 762 On/Off Switch 770 IR Preamplifier 771 Final Amplifier 772 Data correction level 773 automatic gain control circuit 774 preamplifier gain /bias signal 775 edge detector 776 crystal oscillator 777 inverter / buffer 778 buffer 780 analog converter 781 low pass filter wave 782 audio amplifier 800 vehicle 801 communication system 802 power system 803 DVD player 804 wiring device 805 wireless communication device 106124.doc -90- 1335154

806 傳輸器 807 電線 809 頂襯 810 中繼器 811 柔軟材料 813 美觀材料 815 中空空間 8 17 狹長空間 819 第二透明罩 820 插件單元/通訊系統 822 配接器模組 823 電線 824 煞車燈 826 傳輸器/接收器 827 電線 830 攝影機/接近度感測器 83 1 視訊顯示器 832 DVD播放器 833 監控器 834 MP3播放器 835 麥克風 836 遊戲控制裝置 837 視訊遊戲器 838 視訊顯示裝置 I06124.doc -91 * 1335154 839 IR接收器 842 揚聲器 900 車輛 901 通訊系統 920 全球定位系統單元 921 通訊子系統 922 輔助音訊裝置 923 通訊模組 924 車輛中央處理單元 926 IR接收器/傳輸器 933 使用者 935 使用者 936 遠程控制器 940 無線揚聲器 941 IR接收器/傳輸器 942 子低音揚聲器 950 CD變換器 952 輪胎壓力監控器 980 雙向耳機 982 IR接收器/傳輸器 984 麥克風 988 車輛 990 貢料匯流排 991 無線通訊系統 106l24.doc ·92· 1335154 992 IR模組 1000 無線通訊系統 1010 建築物 1011 房間 1012 房間 1013 房間 1020 通訊網路 1022 電纜網路 1024 電纜數據機 1030 收發器 1032 RF訊號 1034 RF天線 1 036 RF訊號 1040 編碼器/解碼器 1050 IR傳輸器/接收器 1052 IR訊號 1060 個人電腦 1062 IR訊號 1070 IR傳輸器/接收器 1080 編碼器/解碼器 1100 家庭影院系統 1110 解碼器 1120 IR傳輸器 1122 IR訊號 106124.doc -93 - 1335154 1130 遠程揚聲器 1140 通訊糸統 1142 電腦 1 144 揚聲器 1146 揚聲器 1148 電纜 1150 收聽者/訊號輸入連接器 1152 音量調節及控制按鈕/電腦 1154 通訊系統》 1160 系統 1162 RF接收器自動開關 1164 音訊1 1166 音訊η 1168 傳輸器驅動器 1170 發光二極體光源 1172 接收器 1174 頻道選擇開關 1176 麥克風 1178 RF傳輸器 1 180 選擇開關 1182 位置 1184 通告/傳呼位置 1185 主音量設定 1186 本機音量調節設定 106124.doc -94-806 Transmitter 807 Wire 809 Top lining 810 Repeater 811 Soft material 813 Aesthetic material 815 Hollow space 8 17 Narrow space 819 Second transparent cover 820 Plug-in unit / Communication system 822 Adapter module 823 Wire 824 Xenon lamp 826 Transmitter / Receiver 827 Wire 830 Camera / Proximity Sensor 83 1 Video Display 832 DVD Player 833 Monitor 834 MP3 Player 835 Microphone 836 Game Control Device 837 Video Game Player 838 Video Display Device I06124.doc -91 * 1335154 839 IR Receiver 842 Speaker 900 Vehicle 901 Communication System 920 Global Positioning System Unit 921 Communication Subsystem 922 Auxiliary Audio Device 923 Communication Module 924 Vehicle Central Processing Unit 926 IR Receiver/Transmitter 933 User 935 User 936 Remote Controller 940 Wireless Speaker 941 IR Receiver / Transmitter 942 Subwoofer 950 CD Inverter 952 Tire Pressure Monitor 980 Two Way Headphone 982 IR Receiver / Transmitter 984 Microphone 988 Vehicle 990 Franchise Bus 991 Wireless Communication System 106l24.doc ·92 · 1335154 992 IR Module 1000 Wireless Communication System 1010 Building 1011 Room 1012 Room 1013 Room 1020 Communication Network 1022 Cable Network 1024 Cable Data Machine 1030 Transceiver 1032 RF Signal 1034 RF Antenna 1 036 RF Signal 1040 Encoder/Decoder 1050 IR Transmission / Receiver 1052 IR Signal 1060 Personal Computer 1062 IR Signal 1070 IR Transmitter / Receiver 1080 Encoder / Decoder 1100 Home Theater System 1110 Decoder 1120 IR Transmitter 1122 IR Signal 106124.doc -93 - 1335154 1130 Remote Speaker 1140 Communication System 1142 Computer 1 144 Speaker 1146 Speaker 1148 Cable 1150 Listener / Signal Input Connector 1152 Volume Adjustment and Control Button / Computer 1154 Communication System 1160 System 1162 RF Receiver Auto Switch 1164 Audio 1 1166 Audio η 1168 Transmitter Driver 1170 LED Light Source 1172 Receiver 1174 Channel Selector Switch 1176 Microphone 1178 RF Transmitter 1 180 Selector Switch 1182 Position 1184 Announce/Paging Location 1185 Master Volume Setting 1186 Local Volume Adjustment Setting 106124.doc -94-

Claims (1)

1335154 月,修正本 第094138686號專利申請案 中文申凊專利範圍替換本(99年6月) 十、申請專利範圍: 1. 一種無線音訊分配系統,其包括·· 一訊號處理器,其將複數個立體音訊輸入對與控制碼 組合為一序列數位位元流; 一傳輪器’其用於無線傳輸該序列數位位元流; 複數個接收器,其回應該經傳輸之序列數位位元流以 依據其中之該控制碼而每一接收器選擇性地產生該立體 音對之一對; -本機設定選擇器’其用於導致每一接收器產生藉由 亥本機。又定選擇器所豸的該彳列數位位元流中之音訊輸 入;及 主叹疋選擇器’其導致一不同音訊輸入將被加入至 該數位位元流以及該本機設定選擇器之操作將被更動, 使传忒等接收器產生該不同音訊,而無需考慮與該複數 個接收益之每一者相關聯之藉由該本機設定選擇器所做 之選擇。 2. 如請求項1之無線音訊分配系統,其進一步包括: 一用於接收該不同音訊之麥克風; 一用於傳輸該不同音訊之射頻傳輸器;及 用於接收該經傳輸之不同音訊之射頻接收器,該射 頻接收器回應用於導致料同音訊被添加至該數位位元 流之該主設定選擇器。 3. 如6月求項2之無線音訊彳配系統,《中該主設定選擇器 與該麥克風相關聯而作為一麥克風開啟開關。 106124-990628.doc 4·如請求項1之無線音訊分配系統,其中該主設定選擇器 導致該不同音訊輸入替代由該訊號處理器組合為該數位 位元流之該複數個音訊輸入之一或多個。 5. 如請求項1之無線音訊分配系統,其中該主設定選擇器 導致該不同音訊輸入被添加至該數位位元流並導致該等 控制碼包含用以導致該接收器選擇該不同音訊之控制 碼。 6. 一種無線音訊分配系統,其包括: 一訊號處理器’其將複數個音訊輸入與控制碼組合為 一序列數位位元流; 一傳輸器,其用於無線傳輸該序列數位位元流; 一接收益,其回應該經傳輸之序列數位位元流以依據 其中之5玄控制碼選擇性地產生音訊; 一本機設定選擇器,其用於導致該接收器產生藉由該 本機設定選擇器所選的該序列數位位元流中之一或多個 該複數個音訊輸入之音訊; 稷數個額外接收器,其各回應該經傳輸之序列數位位 元抓,且各具有一可獨立操作之本機設定選擇器,該本 機設定選擇器用於導致與其相關聯之該接收器產生該本 機設定選擇器所選之音訊;及 Λ -主設定選擇器’其用於選擇性地更動該本機設定選 擇器之操“導致該等接收器產生關於非藉由該本機設 定選擇器所選之一不同音訊輸入的音訊, ,以替 其中該主設定選擇器導致該不同音訊得以應用 I06124-990628.doc 1335154 代该數位位元流中之該複數個音訊輸入,以使得該不同 音讯係由該複數個接收器之每一者予以產生,而無需考 慮與該複數個接收器之每一者相關聯之藉由該本機設定 選擇器所做之選擇。 一種無線音訊分配系統,其包括: 一訊號處理器’其將複數個音訊輸入與控制碼組合為 一序列數位位元流; 一傳輸器’其用於無線傳輸該序列數位位元流; 一接收器’其回應該經傳輸之序列數位位元流以依據 其中之該控制碼選擇性地產生音訊; 一本機設定選擇器,其用於導致該接收器產生關於藉 由該本機設定選擇器所選的該序列數位位元流中之一或 多個該複數個音訊輸入之音訊; 複數個額外接收器,其各回應該經傳輸之序列數位位 兀流,且各具有一可獨立操作之本機設定選擇器,該本 機没定選擇器用於導致與其相關聯之該接收器產生該本 機設定選擇器所選之音訊;及 一主設定選擇器,其用於選擇性地更動該本機設定選 擇器之操作以導致該等接收器產生關於非藉由該本機設 定選擇器所選之一不同音訊輸入的音訊, 其中該主設定選擇器導致該不同音訊被添加至該數位 位元流,並導致該等控制碼導致該不同音訊係由該複數 個接收器之每一者予以產生,而無需考慮與該複數個接 收器之每一者相關聯之藉由該本機設定選擇器所做之選 106124-990628.doc 寸 335154 擇。 8· 一種無線音訊分配系統,其包括: 訊號處理器’其將複數個音訊輸入與控制碼組合為 一序列數位位元流; 一傳輸器’其用於無線傳輸該序列數位位元流; -接收器’其回應該經傳輸之序列數位位元流以依據 其中之该控制碼選擇性地產生音訊; 一本機設定選擇器,其用於導致該接收器產生關於藉 由該本機設定選擇器所選的該序列數位位元流中之一或 多個该複數個音訊輸入之音訊; 複數個額外接收器,《纟回應該經傳輸之序列數位位 兀流,且各具有一可獨立操作之本機設定選擇器,該本 機設定選擇器Μ導致與其相關聯之該接收器產生該本 機設定選擇器所選之音訊;及 一主設定選擇器,其用於選擇性地更動該本機設定選 擇器之操作以導致該等接收器產生關於非藉由該本機設 定選擇器所選之一不同音訊輸入的音訊, 其中該主設定選擇器導致該不同音訊被添加至該數位 位元流,並導致該等控制碼導致該不同音訊係由該複數 個接收器之一子組予以產生,而無需考慮與該複數個接 收器之每一者相關聯之藉由該本機設定選擇器所做之選 擇。 9. 一種無線音訊分配系統,其包括: 一訊號處理器,其將複數個音訊輸入與控制碼組合為 106124-990628.doc 1335154 一序列數位位元流; 一傳輸器’其用於無線傳輸該序列數位位元流; 一接收益’其回應該經傳輸之序列數位位元流以依據 其中之戎控制碼選擇性地產生音訊; 一本機設定選擇器’其用於導致該接收器產生關於藉 由該本機設定選擇器所選的該序列數位位元流中之一或 多個該複數個音訊輸入之音訊; 複數個額外接收器’其各回應該經傳輸之序列數位位 凡流’且各具有一可獨立操作之本機設定選擇器,該本 機設定選擇器用於導致與其相關聯之該接收器產生該本 機設定選擇器所選之音訊;及 一主設定選擇器,其用於選擇性地更動該本機設定選 擇器之操作以導致該等接收器產生關於非藉由該本機設 定選擇器所選之一不同音訊輸入的音訊, 其中該主設定選擇進一步包括: 一與一麥克風相關聯之按鈕開關,其啟動導致該不同 音訊替代該序列數位位元流中之該複數個音訊輸入以 使得當該按鈕開關被啟動時,該複數個接收器之至少一 些接收器產生該不同音訊,而無需考慮與該複數個接收 益之每一者相關聯之藉由該本機設定選擇器所做之選 擇。 ίο. —種無線音訊分配系統,其包括: 一訊號處理器,其將複數個音訊輸入與控制碼組合為 一序列數位位元流; 106124-990628.doc -5· 一傳輸器’其用於無線傳輸該序列數位位元流; 接收器,其回應該經傳輪之序列位元流以依據其 中之該控制碼選擇性地產生音訊; 本機s又疋選擇器,其可操作以導致該接收器產生關 於該複數個音訊輸入之至少—個之所選音訊;及 一用於設定一音量之本機音量控制選擇器,該所選音 :係以該音量產生其中該等控制碼中之音量控制碼設定 藉由該接收器產生之該音訊之—最大音量,而無需考慮 該本機設定選擇器之選擇。 11. 一種無線音訊分配系統,其包括: 一訊號處理器,其將複數個音訊輸入與控制碼組合為 一序列數位位元流; 一傳輸器’其用於無線傳輸該序列數位位元流; 一接收器,其回應該經傳輸之序列數位位元流以依據 其中之該控制碼選擇性地產生音訊; 一本機设定選擇器,其用於導致該接收器產生關於藉 由該本機設定選擇器所選的該序列數位位元流中之一或 多個該複數個音訊輸入之音訊;及 一與該訊號處理器相關聯之主設定選擇器,其用於選 擇性地更動該本機設定選擇器之操作以導致該等接收器 產生關於非藉由該本機設定選擇器所選之一不同音訊輸 入的音訊。 12 · —種無線音訊分配系統,其包括: 一訊號處理器,其將複數個音訊輸入與控制碼組合為 106124-990628.doc 1335154 一序列數位位元流; 一傳輸器,其用於無線傳輸該序列數位位元流; 一接收器,其回應該經傳輸之序列數位位元流以依據 其中之該控制碼選擇性地產生音訊; 一本機設定選擇器,其可操作以導致該接收器產生關 於該複數個音訊輸入之至少一個之所選音訊;及 一與該訊號處理器相關聯之主設定選擇器,其用於選 擇性地更動該本機設定選擇器之操作以導致該等接收器 產生關於一不同音訊輸入的音訊,而非在藉由該本機設 定選擇器可選擇之該複數個音訊輸入。 106124-990628.doc1335154, Amendment to the Patent Application No. 094138686, the Chinese patent application scope replacement (June 99) X. Patent application scope: 1. A wireless audio distribution system, comprising: a signal processor, which will be plural The stereo audio input pair and the control code are combined into a sequence of digital bit streams; a passer is used for wirelessly transmitting the sequence of digital bit streams; and a plurality of receivers are corresponding to the transmitted sequence of digital bit streams One pair of the pair of stereo pairs is selectively generated by each receiver according to the control code therein; - the local setting selector 'is used to cause each receiver to be generated by the local machine. And determining, by the selector, the audio input in the array of bit streams; and the main sigh selector 'which causes a different audio input to be added to the digital bit stream and the operation of the local setting selector The change will be made so that the receiver or the like generates the different audio without having to consider the selection made by the local setting selector associated with each of the plurality of receiving benefits. 2. The wireless audio distribution system of claim 1, further comprising: a microphone for receiving the different audio; a radio frequency transmitter for transmitting the different audio; and a radio frequency for receiving the transmitted different audio And a receiver that responds to the master setting selector for causing the same audio to be added to the digital bit stream. 3. As in the June 2 wireless audio matching system, the main setting selector is associated with the microphone as a microphone on switch. 106124-990628.doc. The wireless audio distribution system of claim 1, wherein the primary setting selector causes the different audio input to be replaced by the signal processor as one of the plurality of audio inputs of the digital bit stream or Multiple. 5. The wireless audio distribution system of claim 1, wherein the primary setting selector causes the different audio input to be added to the digital bit stream and causing the control code to include control for causing the receiver to select the different audio code. 6. A wireless audio distribution system, comprising: a signal processor that combines a plurality of audio inputs and control codes into a sequence of bit-bit streams; a transmitter for wirelessly transmitting the sequence of digital bit streams; a receiving benefit, which should be transmitted through the sequence of digital bit streams to selectively generate audio according to 5 of the control codes; a local setting selector for causing the receiver to be generated by the local device One or more audio inputs of the plurality of audio input streams selected by the selector; a plurality of additional receivers, each of which should be captured by the transmitted sequence digits, and each having an independent Operating local setting selector for causing the receiver associated therewith to generate the audio selected by the local setting selector; and Λ - main setting selector 'for selective actuation The operation of the local setting selector "causes the receivers to generate audio information about a different audio input that is not selected by the local setting selector, for the main setting The selector causes the different audio to be applied by I06124-990628.doc 1335154 to generate the plurality of audio inputs in the digitized bit stream such that the different audio system is generated by each of the plurality of receivers without regard to consideration A selection made by the local setting selector associated with each of the plurality of receivers. A wireless audio distribution system comprising: a signal processor that combines a plurality of audio inputs with a control code a sequence of bit-bit streams; a transmitter 'for wirelessly transmitting the sequence of bit-bit streams; a receiver' which is responsive to the transmitted sequence of bit-bit streams for selective generation based on the control code therein Audio; a local setting selector for causing the receiver to generate audio for one or more of the plurality of audio inputs in the sequence of bitstreams selected by the local setting selector; An additional receiver, each of which should be tuned by the transmitted sequence digits, and each has an independently operable local setting selector, the machine has no choice Used to cause the receiver associated therewith to generate the audio selected by the local setting selector; and a master setting selector for selectively changing the operation of the local setting selector to cause the receivers Generating audio about a different audio input selected by the local setting selector, wherein the primary setting selector causes the different audio to be added to the digital bit stream and causing the control code to cause the different audio Each of the plurality of receivers is generated without considering the selection of 106124-990628.doc 335154 selected by the local setting selector associated with each of the plurality of receivers 8. A wireless audio distribution system, comprising: a signal processor that combines a plurality of audio inputs and control codes into a sequence of bit-bit streams; and a transmitter that wirelessly transmits the sequence of digital bit streams; - the receiver 'receives the transmitted sequence of bit streams to selectively generate audio in accordance with the control code therein; a local setting selector that is used to cause The receiver generates audio about one or more of the plurality of audio inputs in the sequence of digit bit streams selected by the local setting selector; a plurality of additional receivers, "returning the sequence number that should be transmitted Bit turbulent, and each having an independently operable local setting selector, the local setting selector causing the receiver associated therewith to generate the audio selected by the local setting selector; and a master setting selection Means for selectively changing the operation of the local setting selector to cause the receivers to generate audio regarding different audio inputs not selected by the local setting selector, wherein the main setting selector Causing the different audio to be added to the digital bit stream and causing the control codes to cause the different audio system to be generated by a subset of the plurality of receivers without regard to each of the plurality of receivers Associated with the selection made by the local setting selector. 9. A wireless audio distribution system, comprising: a signal processor that combines a plurality of audio inputs and control codes into a sequence of 106124-990628.doc 1335154 a sequence of bit digits; a transmitter 'for wireless transmission of the a sequence of bit-bit streams; a receiving benefit that should be transmitted through the sequence of bit-bit streams to selectively generate audio in accordance with the control code therein; a local setting selector 'which is used to cause the receiver to generate By means of the local setting selector, one or more of the plurality of audio input streams in the serial bit stream selected by the selector; a plurality of additional receivers whose respective sequences should be transmitted through the sequence of digits Each having an independently operable local setting selector for causing the receiver associated therewith to generate the audio selected by the local setting selector; and a main setting selector for Selectively changing the operation of the local setting selector to cause the receivers to generate sounds for different audio inputs not selected by the local setting selector The primary setting selection further includes: a button switch associated with a microphone, the activation causing the different audio to replace the plurality of audio inputs in the sequence of digitized bit streams such that when the button switch is activated, At least some of the plurality of receivers generate the different audio without having to consider the selection made by the local setting selector associated with each of the plurality of receiving benefits. Ίο. A wireless audio distribution system, comprising: a signal processor that combines a plurality of audio inputs and control codes into a sequence of bit-bit streams; 106124-990628.doc -5· a transmitter' Wirelessly transmitting the sequence of bit streams; the receiver, which is responsive to the sequence of bit streams of the pass, to selectively generate audio in accordance with the control code therein; the local device s is further operable to cause the reception Generating at least one selected audio for the plurality of audio inputs; and a local volume control selector for setting a volume at which the volume is generated in the control code The control code sets the maximum volume of the audio produced by the receiver without regard to the selection of the local setting selector. 11. A wireless audio distribution system, comprising: a signal processor that combines a plurality of audio inputs and control codes into a sequence of bit-bit streams; a transmitter that wirelessly transmits the sequence of digital bit streams; a receiver that is responsive to the transmitted sequence of bit streams to selectively generate audio in accordance with the control code therein; a local setting selector for causing the receiver to generate information about the local And setting a sound of one or more of the plurality of audio input streams selected by the selector; and a main setting selector associated with the signal processor for selectively changing the original The machine sets the operation of the selector to cause the receivers to generate audio regarding different audio inputs that are not selected by the local setting selector. 12 - A wireless audio distribution system, comprising: a signal processor, which combines a plurality of audio input and control codes into a 106124-990628.doc 1335154 sequence of digital bit streams; a transmitter for wireless transmission a sequence of bit-bit streams; a receiver that is responsive to the transmitted sequence of bit-bit streams to selectively generate audio in accordance with the control code; a local setting selector operable to cause the receiver Generating a selected audio for at least one of the plurality of audio inputs; and a master setting selector associated with the signal processor for selectively changing an operation of the local setting selector to cause the receiving The device generates audio about a different audio input, rather than the plurality of audio inputs that are selectable by the local setting selector. 106124-990628.doc
TW94138686A 2004-11-04 2005-11-04 Wireless audio distribution system TWI335154B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US62499204P 2004-11-04 2004-11-04

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW200637218A TW200637218A (en) 2006-10-16
TWI335154B true TWI335154B (en) 2010-12-21

Family

ID=36337036

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW94138686A TWI335154B (en) 2004-11-04 2005-11-04 Wireless audio distribution system

Country Status (3)

Country Link
CA (1) CA2585941C (en)
TW (1) TWI335154B (en)
WO (1) WO2006052772A2 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI458990B (en) * 2013-01-24 2014-11-01 Cyrustek Corp Digital multi-meter with lcr function
TWI478562B (en) * 2011-07-06 2015-03-21 Broadcom Corp Response frame modulation coding set (mcs) selection within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or mimo wireless communications
US9402147B2 (en) 2011-07-11 2016-07-26 National Taiwan University Enhanced paging mechanism for machine type communication
TWI615040B (en) * 2016-06-08 2018-02-11 視訊聮合科技股份有限公司 Multi-function modulized loudspeacker

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FR3023104B1 (en) * 2014-06-30 2016-07-29 Airbus Operations Sas AUDIO SYSTEM OF AN AIRCRAFT DRIVING UNIT AND A METHOD FOR CONTROLLING SUCH AN AUDIO SYSTEM
JP7047833B2 (en) * 2017-03-13 2022-04-05 ソニーグループ株式会社 Terminal device, control method and audio data playback system

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5666658A (en) * 1991-03-07 1997-09-09 Recoton Corporation Wireless signal transmission system, method and apparatus
IL118230A0 (en) * 1995-05-25 1996-09-12 Voquette Network Ltd A vocal information system
US6987947B2 (en) * 2001-10-30 2006-01-17 Unwired Technology Llc Multiple channel wireless communication system

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI478562B (en) * 2011-07-06 2015-03-21 Broadcom Corp Response frame modulation coding set (mcs) selection within single user, multiple user, multiple access, and/or mimo wireless communications
US9402147B2 (en) 2011-07-11 2016-07-26 National Taiwan University Enhanced paging mechanism for machine type communication
US10091764B2 (en) 2011-07-11 2018-10-02 Mediatek Inc. Enhanced paging mechanism for machine type communication
TWI458990B (en) * 2013-01-24 2014-11-01 Cyrustek Corp Digital multi-meter with lcr function
TWI615040B (en) * 2016-06-08 2018-02-11 視訊聮合科技股份有限公司 Multi-function modulized loudspeacker

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CA2585941A1 (en) 2006-05-18
WO2006052772A3 (en) 2006-11-23
TW200637218A (en) 2006-10-16
WO2006052772B1 (en) 2007-02-01
WO2006052772A2 (en) 2006-05-18
CA2585941C (en) 2014-01-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7937118B2 (en) Wireless audio distribution system with range based slow muting
US8208654B2 (en) Noise cancellation for wireless audio distribution system
US8290173B2 (en) Wireless speakers
US7359671B2 (en) Multiple channel wireless communication system
US7076204B2 (en) Multiple channel wireless communication system
JP4322680B2 (en) Multi-channel wireless communication system
JP6949921B2 (en) Media playback from a portable media device connected to the dock
TWI335154B (en) Wireless audio distribution system
JP4927543B2 (en) Surround sound system low frequency effect and surround channel wireless digital transmission
US20100188212A1 (en) Applications for a Two-Way Wireless Speaker System
US20140083278A1 (en) Direct vocal and instrument monitor
KR20080077083A (en) Wireless infrared multimedia system
AU2039500A (en) Digital wireless loudspeaker system
US20070060195A1 (en) Communication apparatus for playing sound signals
US20060264250A1 (en) Remote control system with a wireless earphone function and corresponding method
JP2002112400A (en) Car audio system
JP2011091666A (en) Music reproduction system for vehicle interior, and music reproduction adapter
JP2005260755A (en) Surround system
KR20060112548A (en) Mobile terminal which having function of the wireless surround-speaker
JP2007134943A (en) Audio system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees